JP7436045B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition.

Some of these gaming machines control the game to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the end of a special game (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2018-057968A

However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the main control means includes a first determining means that executes a determination regarding execution of the special game based on determination information acquired based on winning of a game medium in a special starting area ; a first storage means for storing, as a first pending memory, determination information acquired based on winning of a game medium in the special starting area but not yet determined by the first determination means; and determination by the first determination means. a first variable display execution means that executes a first variable display based on the result; a first look-ahead means that makes a determination regarding execution of the special game before the first determination means; and a game medium to a normal starting area. a second determining means for executing a determination related to the execution of an auxiliary game that controls the special start area to be open based on determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the normal starting area; a second storage means for storing, as a second pending memory, determination information on which the determination has been made but the determination by the second determination means has not been performed; and a second fluctuation display for performing a second fluctuation display based on the determination result of the second determination means. a display execution means; a second look-ahead means for making a determination regarding execution of the auxiliary game before the second determination means; a first game state; and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a state control means capable of controlling a game state, and a prefetch command according to a determination result of the first prefetching means when a gaming medium wins in the special start area , and a number of the first pending memories. It is possible to transmit a hold command according to the determination result of the second read-ahead means and a hold command according to the number of the second hold memories when a game medium wins in the normal start area. A hold command can be transmitted, and the effect control means can execute a prefetch effect display according to the prefetch command and a hold number display according to the hold command, and the first variable display and/or During the execution of the second variable display, it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates in a predetermined manner, and when a game medium is won in the special start area during the first gaming state. , when the prefetch effect display in response to the prefetch command and the pending number display in response to the hold command are executed, and a gaming medium is won in the normal start area during the first gaming state, the prefetch command Although execution of the prefetch effect display according to the suspension command is restricted, the suspension number display according to the suspension command is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of main RAM. It is a diagram showing a game flow of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing initial setting processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows gate detection switch input processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time-savings. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure advance judgment table. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a big winning a prize opening control data determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing small winning game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game. It is a figure which shows the general map general electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used in general electric power supply control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting control process in a main control board. It is a timing chart when a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game. It is a timing chart when the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of time-saving special symbols becomes 0. It is a timing chart when a big winning game starts from a small winning game and the time saving game state ends. It is a timing chart when the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols becomes 0 and the time-saving game state ends. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the production control section. It is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing of a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a flowchart showing a winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of a prize winning. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-read continuous performance determination process of a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation effect pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable production pattern determination table for time saving. It is a figure showing preview performance decision processing in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the accessory advance notice determination table at the time of a fluctuation|variation start. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reach notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an advanced production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the 3rd time-saving type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a customer waiting state occurs during a normal gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a look-ahead performance is executed during a normal gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a pre-reading performance ends midway during a normal game state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after shifting to the first time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the performance example when the variable performance is executed after shifting to the first time-saving game state. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance after an advantageous result to a player is notified by a common figure fluctuation performance during a time-saving game state. It is a figure showing example 2 of performance after a player is informed of an advantageous result in a regular pattern variation performance during a time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 2 after the player is notified of an advantageous result in the regular pattern fluctuation performance during the time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a result display is performed when the time-saving game state ends. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a result display is not performed when a time-saving game state ends. It is a figure showing various tables in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the battle mode performance is performed in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing the continuation of the production example in which the battle mode production is performed in the second embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a dispensing device 95 (to be described later) dispensing an audio signal based on the establishment of dispensing conditions. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls; A firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations at the top of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, audio) effects. It looks like this. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 1 or 2 ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a production button 17 that can be set in a normal state and a normal state. an effect button drive device 17b, which includes a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 to a protruding state located above the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 to a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; Further, a performance button light emitting LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between an off state and a lighted state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) is provided to enable a player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are rented by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. During this period, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 4), and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 4) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 (see FIG. 4) for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a game board mounting frame 3 and A locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 4) for driving the firing member, and a firing member that slopes upward from the firing member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper are provided for stopping the game ball at a shooting position that is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 4) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When the game balls that have won (balls entered) in this general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (the granting conditions are met), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are The balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded with prize value).

Below the stage part 42, there is a first starting hole 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which a game ball can always win (entering). When a game ball played (ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are delivered to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). The ball is then paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (awarded with prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp light emitting effect to be described later is performed is provided, and a lens member 75a is provided so as to cover the front of the starting port lamp 75. (object) is provided.

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, there is a mark indicating whether or not it is impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the hit determination described later). A variable starting section 46 is provided which can convert from a difficult closed state to an open state where it is possible to win a game ball or is easy.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and also includes a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-back direction, and a second A second starting port 47 (starting winning area with a second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting port opening/closing member 48, and a second starting port that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47. By moving the starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) and the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second starting port 47 is changed to the closed state, and the second starting port is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 4) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 into an open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning-permitting position).

Then, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 which is in the open state during the auxiliary game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (the granting condition is met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

The right side game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40 has an upstream flow path 91a into which all the game balls fired toward the right side game area flow, and almost all of the game balls that flowed out from the upstream flow path 91a. A left side flow path 91c into which game balls that bounced to the left without flowing into the center flow path 91b flow into the center flow path 91b, and a right side flow path into which game balls that bounced to the right without flowing into the center flow path 91b flow into. 91d of channels, a first downstream channel 91e into which almost all of the game balls flowing out from the center channel 91b and the game balls flowing out from the right channel 91d flow; A second downstream channel 91f is provided into which the game balls that have bounced and the game balls that have flowed out from the left channel 91c flow into the second downstream channel 91f.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, there is provided a regular game ball gate 44 (general game starting area) through which game balls can pass at all times, and game balls that have passed through the regular game gate 44 are detected by a gate detection switch 44a. If so, the prize ball is not awarded, but the right to make an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a winning game is granted (general figure determination information to be described later is stored).

In the middle of the central channel 91b, there is a channel that changes from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination) to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize or to be opened easily. A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for game balls by having an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). a first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a first grand prize opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first great winning opening opening/closing member 51; By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a that detects the game ball that has won (entered the ball) into the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position). For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the open state by converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning permissible position). A first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 4) is provided.

Then, when the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during a small winning game to be described later, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 A game ball that was flowing down the upper surface or a game ball that reached the first big prize opening 50 enters the first big winning opening 50, and this game ball is detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 50a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for the game ball, and also opens and closes a specific area that can be moved in the front and rear directions. A member 52, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, and a specific area detection switch 53a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has entered (entered) the specific area 53. By moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the front (winning restriction position), the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the specific area 53 is changed to a closed state. A flow path switching solenoid 52b for converting the region 53 into an open state and an outlet 54 through which game balls that have not flowed into the specific region 53 flow are provided.

Then, when a game ball passes (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, no prize ball will be awarded. After the small winning game ends, a jackpot game to be described later is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a is set as the specific area, and the first large winning hole is opened during the small winning game described later. A jackpot game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small jackpot game ends by detecting the game ball that has flowed into the jackpot by the first jackpot detection switch 50a.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a small win game that change the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but when a jackpot game is treated as a special game and a small win game is treated as a specific game. There is.

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is possible or easy to win a prize from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning part 55 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). a second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a second grand prize opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second major winning opening opening/closing member 57. Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a that detects the game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved toward the front (winning regulation position). By doing so, the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the open state. A second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 4) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big prize opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening/closing member 57 flows down. When a game ball that has been playing or a game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56 and this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Balls (for example, 10 game balls) are put out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, the front of the right side gaming area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and the back side of the decorative member 91 and the front of the central flow path 91b (first prize opening opening/closing A plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals (directly above the member 51) at intervals. Furthermore, a plurality of rear protrusions 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central channel 91b (directly above the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 By forming a meandering flow path with the front protrusion 91b2 and the front protrusion 91b2, the flowing speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (particularly on the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) is attenuated. There is. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Furthermore, a plurality of front protrusions 91c2 that protrude rearward are arranged at intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 91 and at a position in front of the first downstream channel 91e (directly above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57). It is set up with a gap between. Furthermore, a plurality of rear protrusions 91c1 are provided on the back wall of the first downstream channel 91e (directly above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91c2. A meandering flow path is formed by the portion 91c1 and the front protrusion 91c2, thereby attenuating the flowing speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (particularly the upper surface of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57). It looks like this. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

The game ball launched into the left side game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down via the stage part 42 and is placed below the decorative frame 40. The winnings will be won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, it is possible to win ( pass).

In addition, the game balls fired into the right side game area pass through the upstream flow path 91a, the center flow path 91b (general gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first downstream flow path 91e. Flowing down the second downstream channel 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right side gaming area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), The prize will be won in any of the second variable winning parts 55 (second big winning opening 56), or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, no prizes are won in the general winning hole 43 or the first starting hole 45 provided in the left side gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the game balls that have been won in the out hole 39. An out ball flow path is provided that receives and collects out balls that have flown in and causes them to flow down, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there is a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, and a second special symbol reservation. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , the second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the common symbol gate 44.

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, special pattern determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination) This corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and determining whether to execute a jackpot game or a small win game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 each include a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, small win mode, loss mode).

Note that in this embodiment, a "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination. "Jackpot game" means a round game in which the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times ( For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls by playing the game over four or ten times.

In addition, the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time. Even so, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the big prize opening. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

Furthermore, "small win" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a small win game (special game) in the jackpot determination. A “small winning game” is a game in which a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from a closed state to an open state in a manner more disadvantageous than in a big winning game is likely to win prize balls. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the big prize opening in small winning games is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, the predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10 balls) wins (balls entered), the small winning game ends. Note that, unlike the jackpot game, the game state does not change just by executing the small win game.

The auxiliary game judgment is based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.). This corresponds to acquiring the information and determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired common figure determination information. Note that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol to notify the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the auxiliary game determination (win mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in auxiliary game determination. The term "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win a prize (balls entered), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided which have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. This is for displaying the first pending memory (U1), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first pending items. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the second pending memory (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of second pending items. Although a maximum of four second reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation may not be stored.

The normal symbol reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary symbols pending, which is the number of ordinary symbols determination information (general symbols pending) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes through) the ordinary symbol gate 44. It is used to display the number of ordinary drawings, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of pending drawings. In addition, although up to 4 pieces of common picture reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than 4, or it is also possible not to store common picture reserves.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if it is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if it is determined to be a small win, alphabets such as "A" or "C" will be displayed. If the display is stopped and it is determined that the game has lost, a "-" symbol may be displayed as a stop display, and during a fluctuating display, the lights may be turned off and the "-" symbol may be repeated.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. The LED starts lighting up, continues to light up during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED when the jackpot game ends. For example, if it is a jackpot game with four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that encourages firing the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting) during a jackpot state (special game) or time-saving game state. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. starts lighting up, and turns off the LED when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, It is now possible to easily check whether there are any. Note that the status confirmation display 68 may be installed at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and may be installed at other locations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but it is difficult to know which mode it is set to. may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. You can also do the opposite.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the second special symbol reservation display 64, and the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed indicator 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable performance device 73 for executing motion performance is provided, and a variable notification LED 59 for reporting the variable display state of the special symbol is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is not being executed, a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed, and the execution of a jackpot game. There is a jackpot performance that takes place during the event.

Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable effect, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. It becomes.

Specifically, the vertical direction is between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a presentation position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (ascending, descending). Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a variable display area for executing variable effects. A mode display area and the like are formed to indicate the production mode related to.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbol, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, as the effect pattern 70a, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode, small win mode). The jackpot mode and the small win mode are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is other modes.

The manner in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is by scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may also be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good.

Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device depending on the result of the jackpot determination. 71 is designed to increase the player's expectation that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbols 70a in a variable manner, but either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 The effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner.

The first image display device 70 includes a first pending icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending memory (U1) in a normal gaming state to be described later, and a time saving gaming state to be described later. , a normal pattern holding icon display area 70D for displaying a number of normal pattern holding icons corresponding to the normal pattern holding memory (F), and a variable performance (fluctuating display of symbols) being executed regardless of the gaming state. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating the game, the first pending number display area 70E for numerically displaying the number of the first pending memory (U1) regardless of the gaming state, A second pending number display area 70F for numerically displaying the number of second pending memories (U2) regardless of the state, and a general display area 70F for displaying numerically the number of fugu pending memories (F) regardless of the gaming state. A reservation number display area 70G and the like are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area). , a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area), and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 have a number of first reservations corresponding to the number of first reservation memories (U1). An icon will be displayed. Note that the icon corresponding to the second pending storage (U2) is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display section 70B2 displays the second pending icon. A first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display section 70B3. A first pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The general figure reservation icon display area 70D includes, from the left side, a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 ( The first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display a number of standard reservation icons corresponding to the number of second reservation memories (U2). Note that the icon corresponding to the second reservation memory (U2) is not displayed in the general figure reservation icon display area 70D.

Specifically, the first display section 70D1 displays a normal pattern holding icon indicating the normal pattern holding memory in which the fluctuating display of the normal pattern is executed first, and the second display section 70D2 displays the normal pattern holding icon that indicates the normal pattern holding memory. A normal pattern holding icon indicating a normal pattern holding memory in which a variable display of symbols is executed is displayed, and a normal pattern holding icon indicating a normal pattern holding memory in which a variable display of a normal pattern is executed in the third display section 70D3 is displayed. A figure hold icon is displayed, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a normal figure hold icon indicating the normal figure hold memory in which the variable display of the normal symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the regular figure reserved icon display area 70D. The icon will be displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 70a), the first pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the first special symbol (production symbol 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. The icon disappears (erases) when the process ends.

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol (performance symbol 70a), the common symbol pending icons displayed in the common symbol pending icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. , the normal pattern pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 becomes the corresponding icon by moving (shifting) to the corresponding icon display area 70C, and the corresponding icon disappears when the variable display of the normal pattern (production pattern 70a) ends. (to erase. Note that the icon may disappear during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In this way, during the normal gaming state (first gaming state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more important than the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol pending icon corresponding to the common symbol pending memory (F) is Although the display is limited, it is possible to display the first pending icon corresponding to the first pending memory (U1), and the time-saving gaming state ( During the second gaming state), the display of the first hold icon corresponding to the first hold memory (U1) is restricted, but the display of the normal game hold icon corresponding to the normal game hold memory (F) is possible. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to display a pending icon according to the degree of importance with respect to the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state (first gaming state) or in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), the numerical display of the first pending storage (U1) in the first pending number display area 70E, The second reservation number display area 70F displays the numbers in the second reservation memory (U2), and the regular figure reservation number display area 70G displays the numbers in the regular figure reservation memory (F). Therefore, it is possible to constantly check various pending memories, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving production modes A to C), when not in the predetermined production mode (during stock chance production described later), the pending icon corresponding to the normal symbol or the icon is displayed, while the predetermined production mode ( During stock chance performance (to be described later), the pending icon corresponding to the normal symbol or the icon may not be displayed, or vice versa.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are movable while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable display of the performance symbol 70a. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined motion, it is possible to perform motion effects. Furthermore, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 and near the center (downward) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (raise, descend) between the production position (second position) and the current performance position (second position). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The fluctuation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED as part of the board illumination device 74, and includes a first fluctuation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol, a second fluctuation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol, and a normal symbol. A third fluctuation notification LED 59c corresponding to the above is provided.

The first fluctuation notification LED 59a starts changing the color (fluctuating display of the first lamp special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and corresponds to stopping the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. By stopping the color change (fluctuation display of the first lamp special symbol) (turns off if it is a loss, lights up if it is a jackpot), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating. . The second fluctuation notification LED 59b starts changing the color (fluctuating display of the second lamp special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and corresponds to stopping the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. By stopping the color change (fluctuation display of the second lamp special symbol) (turns off if it is a loss, lights up if it is a jackpot), it is possible to notify whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating. . The third fluctuation notification LED 59c starts a color change (fluctuating display of the third lamp special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol, and a color change (fluctuating display of the third lamp special symbol) in response to the stop of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol. By stopping the third lamp (fluctuating display of special symbols) (turns off if it is a loss, and lights up if it is a win), it is notified whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the result of the fluctuating display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the statically displayed performance symbol 70a and the first lamp special symbol, and the combination of the statically displayed performance symbol 70a and the second lamp special symbol Depending on the combination, the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (special game range) may be notified. In addition, the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the second special symbol is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. The results may be notified.

In addition, instead of displaying the first lamp special symbol, second lamp special symbol, and third lamp special symbol by the first fluctuation notification LED 59a, second fluctuation notification LED 59b, and third fluctuation notification LED 59c, the first lamp special symbol Three types of simple special symbols that have the same functions as the symbols, 2nd lamp special symbols, and 3rd lamp special symbols (during the variable display, ○ and × are displayed alternately, and if it is a loss, If so, 0) may be displayed in a variable manner on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and a game ball supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage part 96 that stores balls and supplies them to a payout device 95, a main control device 110A with a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A with a built-in payout control board 120, and a production control board 130. A production control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc. are provided.

In addition, an opening/closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. In addition, the production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74). A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the amount of light.

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m that has a main control unit 110m for clearing the stored contents or for determining the level of advantage of the game (jackpot determination). The RWM clear switch 111a inputs a signal to update the set value (probability of determining a jackpot), and inputs a signal to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute a setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating a numerical value or performance information (see FIG. 41).

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operations), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of payout control commands from the main control board 110. A board 120, a production control board 130 that controls production related to the game based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the production control board 130. It is equipped with 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is controlled by the production control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted only in one direction to the board 130.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports. It has a length of 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, and a second starting opening opening/closing switch. Solenoid 48b, first big winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second big winning hole detection switch 56a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b , magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64 , normal symbol holding display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control A board 120 and a production control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to games while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving various control commands. Control processing and control processing for transmitting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the gaming information output terminal board 90 are performed.

In the "gaming information", the starting hole winning signal, which is output every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A symbol confirmation signal that is output every time, a jackpot signal that is output during a jackpot game, an open signal that is output during a round game (opening of the jackpot), and a time-saving game state that will be described later. A security signal that is output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threaten) to the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs, and the like.

Note that the symbol confirmation signal is not output when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is stopped, but when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is stopped during the normal gaming state, the symbol confirmation signal is not output. If the fluctuating display of normal symbols is stopped during the time-saving gaming state without outputting it, a symbol confirmation signal may be output.

Furthermore, the starting hole winning signal is transmitted when a game ball wins at the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, but when a game ball wins at the regular gate 44, is not output.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls put out from the payout device 95, and a putout ball detection switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage section 96 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows control processing to pay out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing to send a command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, etc. (not shown).
The ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input/output port of the firing control section 122.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized, and fires the ball. When a change in the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is activated so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to fire game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m that collectively controls the progress of production based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a production control unit 130m that controls image display and other operations based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. It is equipped with

The production control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b in which a production control program is stored, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

A production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the production mode of the variable production, control processing for transmitting production control commands based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, and causes the audio output device 9 to display a predetermined sound. and control the output of sounds.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame lighting device 10, the production button drive device 17b (production button drive motor, production button vibration motor), production button light emitting LED 17c, starting port lamp 75, movable production device 73, and the board. A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Thereby, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the production button driving device 17b, the production button light emitting LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable production device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (equivalent to power supply means). The power supply board 160 has a power supply board that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the decrease in power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage). It includes a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage), and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and the production control board 120 and the production control unit 130m are provided so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage). Backup power may be supplied to the production control section 130m. Further, backup power may be supplied only to either one of the payout control board 120 and the production control unit 130m.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the ease of winning a game ball into the second starting port 47 include a "normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)" and a "time-saving gaming state."

Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "normal gaming state." Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the probability of being determined to be a hit is 1/20. Therefore, the average time of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is set to about 5 seconds, and in the event of a winning, the second starting opening 47 is opened in a short opening pattern (0.07 seconds without substantially winning). This refers to the gaming state in which

On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning is 1/20, and the average time of fluctuating display of normal symbols is shorter than in the normal gaming state (about 1.5 seconds). is set, and when it is determined to be a win, the second starting port 47 is set to a short opening pattern (opening for 0.07 seconds, which does not actually win a prize) or a long opening pattern (opening for 3 seconds x 2 times, which makes it easy to win a prize). This is a game state that is advantageous to the player in which the game ball is opened only in a long release pattern and the game ball is more likely to land in the second starting hole 47 compared to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a and enter the game ball into the first starting port 45, and in the time-saving game state, the game method is advantageous for the player. A gaming method in which the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game ball and the game ball enters the regular gate 44 and the second starting port 47 is advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "time-saving game state" includes a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state that are controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), which will be described later, and the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clearing is executed). , the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), and the number of consecutive loss fluctuation displays of the special symbol executed reaches the specified number (750 times in this embodiment) (without going through the jackpot game) ) A controlled third time-saving game state is set.

In addition, the "time saving gaming state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening probability in the long opening pattern of the second starting port 47 are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state". It may be set so that only one of the probability of determining , the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, and the probability of opening in a long opening pattern is advantageous.

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) shows a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters a ball) in the first starting port 45 and/or the second starting port 47 is stored. FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage section of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. 5(c) is a diagram showing the determination information storage area. FIG. This is the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 5(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the ordinary figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information pending storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored. area, a second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and special figure determination information during execution of variable display is stored. The first special symbol determination information storage area and the second special symbol determination information storage area are each divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section.

Then, the number of pieces of special figure judgment information (holding information) of the first special symbol stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first special figure judgment information holding storage area is the number of the first holding memory (U1). Therefore, the number of first pending icons corresponding to the special symbol determination information of these first special symbols are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively.

In addition, the number of pieces of special figure judgment information (holding information) of the second special symbol stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is the number of the second holding memory (U2). However, the number of pending icons corresponding to the special symbol determination information of these second special symbols is not displayed.

In addition, the 0th storage section, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C in the normal gaming state, and the special figure of the first special symbol stored in the 0th storage section. The icon corresponding to the determination information is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for jackpot determination for storing a random number value for determining a jackpot, and a random number storage area for special symbol determination for storing a random number value for special symbol determination. area, a random number storage area for reach determination for storing the random number value for reach determination, and a random number storage area for special figure fluctuation pattern determination for storing the random number value for determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the first special figure determination information holding storage area that does not store the special figure determination information The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smaller number. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest numbered one in which no special figure determination information is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, stores the special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 5(c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes a normal figure determination information holding storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44 is stored; The ordinary figure judgment information execution storage area stores the ordinary figure judgment information during the fluctuating display, and the ordinary figure judgment information holding storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, respectively. .

The number of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of the pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of judgment of pieces of paper stored in the first storage part to the fourth storage part of the storage area for holding pieces of pieces of pieces of paper than that of a piece of paper is the number of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of paper judging information that are stored in the storage area for holding pieces of pieces of paper. The general figure reservation icons are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the ordinary figure reservation icon display area 70D, respectively.

In addition, the 0th storage section, which is the ordinary figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C in the time-saving gaming state, and corresponds to the ordinary figure determination information stored in the 0th memory section. The icon will be displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing random number values for hit determination, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing random number values for normal symbol determination. and a random number storage area for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern for storing random numbers for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information is acquired, it is acquired in the lowest numbered storage section in which normal pattern judgment information is not stored in the normal pattern judgment information storage area. The normal figure determination information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern judgment information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted. and will be referenced to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

(Game flow of gaming machine)
The game flow of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. 6.

In the normal gaming state, when the first jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (abbreviated as special 1 in the figure) is completed, the state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the first When the second jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol (Special 1) is completed, the game shifts to the first time saving game state, and as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (Special 1). When the third jackpot game of 5 rounds (10R) executed as follows is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (abbreviated as special 2 in the figure) is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. However, when the small winning game executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (special 2) ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the normal gaming state is entered, and the specific area is changed during the small winning game. When the fourth jackpot game of 6 rounds (6R: practically 5 rounds) executed by the game ball passing through 53 is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, after clearing RWM or after the end of a jackpot game, regardless of whether or not you went through the time-saving gaming state, the variable display of special symbols that result in a loss continues, not including the number of variable displays of normal symbols. When the game is executed a predetermined number of times (the total number of executions of the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is 750 times), the game shifts to a third time-saving game state.

In the time-saving gaming state, when the first jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (Special 1) ends, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the first special symbol (Special 1) ) When the second jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol ends, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state, and the 10th round (10R) is executed as a result of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. When the third jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (special 2) ends, the time-saving game state shifts to the second time-saving game state, and the second special If the small winning game executed as a result of the variable display of the symbol (special 2) ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the original time saving game state is maintained, and the specific area 53 is played during the small winning game. When the fourth jackpot game of 6 rounds (6R: practically 5 rounds) executed by the passing of the ball is completed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, the remaining number of times the normal symbol fluctuation display that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state (the number of normal symbol fluctuations) is "0", that is, the number of executions of the normal symbol fluctuating display is the specified number (50 times, 100 times, 999 times). ), or the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays that can be executed in the time-saving game state (special symbol fluctuation number) is "0", regardless of whether the small winning game is executed or not. Either the total number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol reaches a prescribed number of times (5 or 10 times), or the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

The degree of advantage in each game state is normal game state<first time-saving game state<second time-saving game state<third time-saving game state.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if the first jackpot game is executed, the game will shift to the normal gaming state, but if the first jackpot game is executed during the normal gaming state, it will shift to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the first jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, the state may be shifted to the first time-saving game state.

Also, although there are no types of small winning games, there may be different types of small winning games, and if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the first small winning game, the fourth jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) is executed, and after the fourth jackpot game is finished, the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the second small win game, the fifth jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) is executed. Then, after the end of the fifth jackpot game, the state may be shifted to the third time-saving game state. In this case, the first small winning game may be executed more easily than the second small winning game, or vice versa.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the panel unit 500 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching A drive source initial operation process for initially operating the solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S51, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here will be referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of payouts in accordance with the remaining number of payouts will be sent to the payout control board 120. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the main RAM 110c is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access, and from then on, power supply is disabled. Wait until it is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power is being restored and the process moves to step S17. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process is transferred to step S17. The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power cut during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value, which is the stage of the advantage level of the game (probability of being judged as a jackpot in jackpot judgment), is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to confirm the setting value. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S20. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S22. move.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, the checksum is determined to be abnormal, as this is due to the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. will be moved.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S22. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a display of an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 displays an unrecoverable error message indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. This means outputting an error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be performed and the process moves to step S24, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game (initialize the area other than the set value area of the main RAM 110c).

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b for a predetermined period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") when the power is turned on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame The lighting device 10 for the board and the lighting device 74 for the panel are fully lit in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71. A display may be displayed to inform you of this.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, processing is performed to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the main RAM 110c on the information display 113, and to finish checking the setting values by operating the setting key switch 112a. .

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S29. Specifically, the various drive sources described above (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second opening/closing opening solenoid 57b) are initialized for a predetermined period of time. Perform processing to make it work. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification and the like and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or The lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols and a command for specifying the number of regular symbols reserved, which will be described later) to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and the image display device performs processing for displaying the reserved symbols.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S33. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, controls the progress of the game (main control) by allowing all interrupts. A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initial setting process is ended.

In other words, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is finished, the game is in a pre-start state before the game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is finished, the game progress control is stopped. The game becomes ready for play.

In this way, while changing settings (during setting change mode) or checking settings (during setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, the status confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, second It is possible to recognize that settings are being changed by checking the image display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 74, and on the back (back side), by checking the information display 113, settings can be changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent with information indicating the current gaming state, but after sending the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

Furthermore, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting change flag, it may be possible to prevent unrecoverable error processing from being performed even if the previous power-off occurred while the settings were being changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs a process of setting predetermined data if there is an input. Note that details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing in step S300. Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the big winning hole. It performs processing such as opening/closing (the first grand prize opening 50 and the second grand prize opening 56), setting the gaming state, etc. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs general electric power control processing in step S400. Specifically, processing such as determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, variable display of the normal pattern, and opening/closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game) is performed. Note that details of the general electric power control process will be described later.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs customer waiting control processing in step S450. Specifically, when a special game (big win game, small win game) or variable performance is not executed, processing is performed such as transmitting a customer waiting designation command to the performance control board 130, assuming that the state has shifted to a customer waiting state. The details of the customer waiting control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big prize opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S600. Specifically, various errors (unauthorized winning errors such as a game ball entering the second starting slot 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or a game ball entering the grand prize opening when not in the special game), and various winnings. An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls entered into the mouth does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which abnormal magnetism is detected over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time, a door open error occurs when the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a occurs while the game progress is being controlled. It is determined whether an error (or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) has occurred, and processing is performed to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the production control board 130. As a result, the production control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

Main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the big winning opening opening/closing data output to the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol. Display 60, special symbol display data output to the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64 Processing is performed to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, a port output that outputs signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data and the big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, and outputs signals such as gaming information data created in step S720. Processing, display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and payout status confirmation to check the payout status of the payout control board 120. Send a specified command to the payout control board 120, or refer to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later, and issue a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning holes. Processing for transmitting the information to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation and display processing in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole starting hole) during normal gaming state, and the number of outs during normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the game state. In addition to calculating the game ball counting process and the normal base value ((normal number of payouts ÷ normal number of outs) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs, the base storage area set in the main RAM 110c is The normal base value calculation process that saves the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area, and the normal base value for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area ( Performance display data setting processing is performed to set performance display data to be displayed on the information display 113 while switching performance information) every 5 seconds.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a once-out area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area is provided for the game, and the normal base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing in step S830. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S850. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the main RAM 110c, permit interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode) before the start of game progress control, so the payout Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and the system is used to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, the detection signal is inputted from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56. It is determined whether or not the ball has been played, and processing for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the second starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do. Note that details of the gate detection switch input processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing in step S260, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and predetermined data is set. Note that details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending memory (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. If the first pending memory (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first pending memory (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first pending memory (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first pending memory (U1) to update the first pending memory (U1). A corresponding first special figure reservation number designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the image display device displays the reservation corresponding to the first reservation memory (U1) (display of the first reservation icon, first reservation number display area display) will be performed. In addition, a first pending memory display (two LEDs) is provided at a position that is visible to the player so that the number of first pending memories (U1) can be checked at all times, and the performance control board 130 is connected to the image display device and the first pending memory (U1). A suspension display corresponding to the first suspension storage (U1) may be displayed on the suspension storage display.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal gaming state is currently in progress. If the game is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9 as pre-reading of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the process is moved to step S230-9. In this case, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is not performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first special figure pre-reading process (prior determination process) in step S230-9. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the special figure pre-determination table (see FIG. 23(a) or FIG. 23(b)) for pre-reading (pre-determining) the special figure determination information is selected, and the currently acquired special figure A first special symbol pre-reading designation command is generated to pre-determine the determination information before the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and notify the performance control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special symbol scheduled variation pattern). Perform the processing to do. Note that details of the preliminary determination table will be described later.

This "first special symbol pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, It is also possible to specify the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game (number of rounds), and the type of time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol pre-read designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first special symbol pre-reading winning designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and one or more variable displays are started before the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol pre-reading designation command starts. A pre-read notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed will be executed over a period of time.

Note that although the upper limit value of the first reservation memory (U1) is "4", it may be more or less than this. Furthermore, the upper limit value of the second pending memory may be smaller or larger than the upper limit value of the second pending memory. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area.

In addition, when in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pre-reading process is performed and the first special figure pre-reading designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130 to execute the pre-reading notice, but in the gaming state Irrespective of the above, the first special figure pre-reading process is performed so that the first special figure pre-reading designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the pre-read preview production is executed when the production control board 130 is in the normal gaming state. In the case of the time-saving gaming state, the execution of the pre-read preview performance may be limited (not executed, executed at a lower probability than in the normal gaming state, etc.).

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 2-prize ball counter used for 2-prize balls by adding data indicating 2-prize balls, and in step S240-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending storage (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-4. If the second pending memory (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the second pending memory (U2) is not less than 4, the current second starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second pending memory (U2) and updating it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second pending memory (U2) to update it (U2←U2+1). A corresponding second special figure reservation number designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a second special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and a reservation display (display in the second reservation number display area 70F) corresponding to the second reservation memory (U2) is performed on the image display device. It turns out. In addition, a second pending memory display (two LEDs) is provided at a position where the player can visually check the number of second pending memories (U2) at all times, and the performance control board 130 is connected to the image display device and the second pending memory display device (U2). A suspension display corresponding to the second suspension storage (U2) may be displayed on the suspension storage display.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S240-3 in the empty storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is in progress. If the game is in the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S240-9 to pre-read the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47, and the process is moved to step S240-9. If not, the current second starting port detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is not performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a second special figure pre-reading process (prior determination process) in step S240-9. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the special figure pre-determination table (see FIG. 23(c) or FIG. 23(d)) for pre-reading (pre-determining) the special figure determination information is selected, and the special figure acquired this time is A second special symbol pre-reading designation for pre-determining the judgment information before the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and notifying the production control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern scheduled variation pattern, pre-reading information) Performs processing to generate commands.

Since this "second special symbol pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the judgment result of the special symbol determination information, the production control board 130 uses the second special symbol pre-reading designation command to determine the type of the second special symbol, the jackpot, etc. As a result of the judgment, it is also possible to specify the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the number of various time reductions (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time reduction game state after the end of the jackpot game. .

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol pre-read designation command generated in step S230-9 to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.
As a result, the second special symbol pre-reading designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and one or more variable displays are started before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol pre-reading designation command starts. A pre-read notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) that makes players expect that a jackpot game will be executed over time will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the second reservation memory (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second pending memory may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first pending memory. Furthermore, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol determination information storage area.

In addition, when in the time-saving gaming state, the second special figure pre-reading process is performed and the second special figure pre-reading designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130 to execute the pre-reading notice, but in the game state Irrespective of the above, the second special figure pre-reading process is performed so that the second special figure pre-reading designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the pre-read notice performance is executed when the performance control board 130 is in the time-saving gaming state. In the case of the normal gaming state, the execution of the pre-read preview performance may be restricted (not executed, executed at a lower probability than in the time-saving gaming state, etc.).

(Main control board gate detection switch input processing)
The gate detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing gate detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input. If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, the process moves to step S250-2, and if the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input, the current gate detection switch input process ends. do.

In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a acquires the normal symbol determination information (random value for hit determination, random value for normal symbol determination, random value for regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination).

In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of ordinary drawings pending memory (F) is less than four. If the general pattern holding memory (F) is less than 4, the process moves to step S250-4, and if the general drawing holding memory (F) is not less than 4, the current gate detection switch input process is ended. .

In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the general figure reservation memory (F) and updating it (F←F+1), and in step S250-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the general figure reserve memory (F) and updates it (F←F+1). A corresponding general figure reservation number designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of reserved symbols is sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of reserved symbols for common symbols corresponding to the reserved symbol memory (F) is displayed on the image display device. In addition, a general figure holding memory display (two LEDs) is provided at a position where the player can visually check the number of normal figures holding memory (F) at all times, and the performance control board 130 is connected to the image display device and the normal figure holding memory display device (two LEDs). A suspension display corresponding to the general figure suspension storage (F) may be displayed on the suspension storage display.

In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches the vacant storage sections of the ordinary figure determination information storage area starting from the first memory section, and stores the ordinary figure determination acquired in step S250-2 in the vacant memory section. Remember information.

In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time saving gaming state is in progress. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process moves to step S250-8 as a pre-reading process of the game ball determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the game ball gate 44, and the process is moved to step S250-8. In this case, the current gate detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the common figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the common figure gate 44 is not performed.

In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a performs normal map pre-reading processing (pre-determination processing). In this ordinary figure pre-reading process, the ordinary figure preliminary determination table (see FIG. 36(a) or FIG. 36(b)) for pre-reading (preliminary judgment) the ordinary figure determination information is selected, and the ordinary figure determination information obtained this time is selected. is pre-determined before the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, and a process of generating a normal symbol pre-reading designation command for notifying the production control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (normal pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern, pre-reading information). conduct.

This "normal symbol pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the judgment result of the normal pattern judgment information, so in the production control board 130, the normal symbol type, the judgment result of the hit judgment, the normal symbol type, the judgment result of the hit judgment, the The type of symbol and the type of auxiliary game (short open, long open) can also be specified.

In step S250-9, the main CPU 110a sets the general pattern pre-read designation command generated in step S250-8 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the ordinary symbol pre-reading designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the assistance is provided over the varying display of one or more ordinary symbols even before the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol pre-reading designation command starts. A pre-read notice (continuous notice presentation, icon change presentation) that makes the player expect the game to be played will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the general figure reservation memory (F) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the general pattern holding memory may be decreased or increased compared to the upper limit value of the first holding storage. Furthermore, the ordinary figure determination information may be stored only in the 0th storage part of the ordinary figure determination information storage area, thereby eliminating the ordinary figure reservation storage itself.

In addition, when it is in the time-saving gaming state, the normal pattern pre-reading process is performed and the normal pattern pre-reading designation command is sent to the production control board 130 to execute the pre-reading notice, but regardless of the gaming state. A general figure pre-reading process is performed so that a general figure pre-reading designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, a pre-read notice performance is executed on the performance control board 130 when the time-saving gaming state is in effect, and a pre-read notice performance is executed when the normal gaming state is in the normal gaming state. The execution of the pre-read notice effect may be limited (not executed, executed at a lower probability than in the time-saving game state, etc.).

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
The specific area detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process moves to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input Finish the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current period is a specific area valid period in which passage of the game ball to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small winning game (conversion game) is in progress. If the small winning game is in progress, the process moves to step S260-3, and if the specific area is not within the valid period, the process moves to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific area passing flag indicating the gaming state when the game ball passes the specific area 53. Setting game state information when passing through the area (information indicating that the current state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current state is the time-saving gaming state, if the current state is the time-saving gaming state) in the main RAM 110c, In step S260-4, a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area valid period is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current specific area detection switch input Finish the process.

Thereby, a specific area passing designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing notification performance is executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the player can understand that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and Detection switch input processing ends.

Thereby, a specific area passing error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing error notification performance is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. Therefore, the employees of the game parlor can understand the occurrence of a passing error and can take appropriate measures.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the process for starting the variable display of special symbols based on the reserved memory (special figure judgment information) and the special figure special electric line processing data are changed to "1". A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for performing processing, etc. is executed, and the current special symbol special electric control process is ended.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 1, the special figure special electric line processing data and the process for stopping and displaying the special symbol and transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 130 as the variable time elapses are changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing processing etc. is executed, and the current special symbol special electric control process is ended.
If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss, and the opening time of the jackpot game will be set if it is a jackpot special symbol, depending on the elapse of the stop time of the special symbol. Then, the special pattern special electricity processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small hit special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set, and the special pattern stop processing to change the special pattern special electricity processing data to "4" ( Step S330) is executed, and the current special figure special electric train control process is ended.

If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing (for performing the process for executing the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round game) Step S340) is executed to end the current special figure special electric control process.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the processing for executing the small winning game or the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to ``0'' or ``3'' based on the completion of the ending of the small winning game are performed. The small winning game process (step S350) is executed, and the current special figure special electric control process is ended.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 5, the jackpot game ending process is performed to perform the process for ending the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game. (Step S360) is executed, and the current special figure special electric control process is ended.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending memory (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending memory (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second pending memory (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reservation memory (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the number of reserved special symbols after the subtraction, here, the second reservation memory (U2). A second special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for updating the reservation icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 is updated, and a performance is performed according to the updated game state.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the second special figure determination information storage area, and shifts one piece of the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units. Shift to previous memory section.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending memory (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first pending memory (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first pending memory (U1) is not 1 or greater, the current special symbol memory determination process is ended. .

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation memory (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the number of reserved special symbols after the subtraction, here the first reservation memory (U1). A corresponding first special figure reservation number designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for updating the reservation icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 is updated, and a performance is performed according to the updated game state.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the first special symbol retention storage area, and moves the special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections to the previous one. Shift to the storage section.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation memory (U1) and the second reservation memory (U2) after the subtraction is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to . As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second reservation storage is shifted to the first reservation storage area). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting slot, the first special figure judgment information retention storage area or the second special figure determination information retention storage area was shifted (first The reserved memory and the second reserved memory may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information reserved storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reserved memory area and shifted (the first reserved memory is subtracted). (subtraction) may be given priority over the second pending storage.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special symbol data of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. Execute jackpot determination processing. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern variation pattern determination process that determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of a variation production performed during the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1" and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing.

In addition, in step S310-6, only the special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the subtracted special figure reservation number (first reservation memory (U1), second reservation memory (U2)) is transmitted. However, both the special pattern reservation number designation command corresponding to the subtracted special pattern reservation number and the non-subtracted special pattern reservation number, that is, the first special pattern reservation number designation command and the second special pattern reservation number designation command. You may also send In this way, for example, even if the production control board 130 has not been able to properly receive (missed) the special symbol reservation number designation command that was sent at the start of the previous special symbol variable display, the next special symbol It becomes possible to correct the first reservation memory (U1) and the second reservation memory (U2) to normal values by the special figure reservation number designation command transmitted at the start of the variable display.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting values stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, the main CPU 110a executes a special A jackpot determination table (see FIG. 18(a) or FIG. 18(b)) corresponding to the type of symbol is selected. The details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (or not). If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, performs special symbol determination for the jackpot to determine the type of the jackpot special symbol. The table (see FIG. 19(a)) is selected, and the process moves to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for jackpot will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small hit, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small hit, it is assumed that there is a loss and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small winning (see FIG. 19(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small winning, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for small winning will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects a loss special symbol determination table (see FIG. 19(c)) for determining a loss special symbol, and moves the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for normal losses will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination against the special symbol determination table. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 18(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 18(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the jackpot judgment table associates the current setting value, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the judgment result (big hit, small hit, loss). For reference, the approximate winning probability for "big win" and "small win" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 18(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. Based on the numerical value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit," "small hit," or "regular loss."

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 18(b), when the set value is "1", the 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "1" to "200" are " The 860 random numbers for jackpot determination from "300" to "59998" are determined to be "small wins," and the other random numbers for jackpot determination are determined to be "losses."

In addition, in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, "lose" is set, but even if you do not set "lose" and instead set a random value other than the random number that is determined to be a jackpot to be determined as a "small hit". good.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 19(a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 19(b) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining a special symbol to stop when a jackpot is determined. 19(c) is a special symbol determination table for small winnings that is referred to when determining the stopping symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a loss. FIG. This is a special symbol determination table for.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) to 19(c), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random value for special symbol determination, and the determination result of special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data indicating this determination result is associated with the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the lighting mode of the LED on the special symbol display is listed in the far right column for reference. There is.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of five rounds, and the special symbol "02" executes the second jackpot game consisting of five rounds. The special symbol "03" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the third jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special symbol "11" executes the third jackpot game described above. It is a jackpot symbol to be executed, and the special symbol "12" is a small winning special symbol to execute a small winning game.

Although details will be described later, the advantageous degree of the various jackpot games is as follows: first jackpot game<second jackpot game<third jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 19 is that the LED (light-emitting member) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol is lit when displaying a losing special symbol. One point is that it includes the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol is a small win special symbol or a loss special symbol, rather than a jackpot special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. , if any of the first to third jackpot games can be executed, and the special pattern determination information (second special pattern) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is judged to be a jackpot. Another point is that a third jackpot game can be executed. By doing this, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes depending on the type of special symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the jackpot special symbol may be greater than or less than three. In addition, the number of LEDs on the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be greater than or equal to two, but even in this case, the number of LEDs on the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be increased or decreased. The number may be different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying.

In addition, the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a loss special symbol are not included (if they are completely different) You may also do so.

Further, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is designed not to win a small hit, it may be possible to win a small hit. In this case, it is preferable that the winning probability is lower than that in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-3, assuming that it is the time-saving gaming state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) from the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 21) for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects a table that corresponds to the game situation from the time-saving special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 22) for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the time-saving gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the number of reservations (U1 or U2), and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The special figure variation pattern is determined by comparing it with the special figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of the variation production is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a selects the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically, the special number executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, clearing the number of fluctuations to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game). Update the number of symbol fluctuation displays by +1. The number of variations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a variable display of the first special symbol, or a variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, this number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is present. If it is not the time-saving game state, the current special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is ended, and if it is the time-saving game state, in step S313-9, the time-saving special symbol remaining number of times ( A time saving number designation command corresponding to J) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a time saving number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the remaining number of time reductions of the special symbol. When this process is finished, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability variable gaming state (high probability time-saving gaming state) where the probability of being judged as a jackpot is higher than the normal gaming state is not generated, the number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of the gaming state. However, if you want to generate a variable probability gaming state that is different from the normal time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (for example, after the end of the second jackpot game), the number of fluctuations in the variable probability gaming state will be updated. It is best to avoid doing so.

In addition, a command indicating the remaining number of time-saving specials (J) is sent as a time-saving number designation command, but not only the remaining number of time-saving specials (J), but also the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) and time-saving A command indicating the remaining number of ordinary cards (G) may be transmitted.

Also, during the time-saving gaming state, a time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) is sent, but the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) is not notified during the time-saving gaming state. (only the remaining number of time-saving general maps (G) is notified), so the time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of time-saving special maps (J) may not be transmitted.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal use)
FIG. 21 is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) shows when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of changes in the special symbol up to the third time-saving gaming state is 51 or more. This is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when performing a variable display of special symbols (in normal production modes A to D), and FIG. 21(b) shows jackpot history information stored in the main RAM 110c. In the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when performing a fluctuation display (during the countdown mode described later) when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the third time-saving game state is 50 or less. be.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving)
FIG. 22 is a time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 22(a) shows a case where a variable display of the special symbol is executed during the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game with the first special symbol. This is the time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 to be referred to, and FIG. 22(b) is during the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game with the second special symbol. Or, it is a time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when performing a variable display of special symbols during the third time-saving game state.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number value for reach judgment, the first holding memory (U1) or the second holding memory (U2), the random number value for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the special pattern variation pattern as the judgment result, and the special pattern. It is associated with the variable time, and the content of the variable effect is described for reference.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify at least the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

As for the production contents shown in the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "super shortened variation" are three production symbols 70a that fluctuate at high speed apart. , which means that a fluctuating effect that stops without becoming a reach is executed.

In addition, "reach" refers to a jackpot game or a first game in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that announces a jackpot with a special symbol or a hit with a normal symbol temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. 2 refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect an auxiliary game in which the starting port 47 is opened long. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a in the left and right regions is "7". This refers to a mode in which the display is temporarily stopped at , and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

In addition, nine types of combinations (jackpot result mode) of the performance pattern 70a that notify a jackpot are set, from "111" to "999", and the performance pattern 70a that reports a hit that causes the second starting port 47 to be opened for a long time. There are 7 types of combinations (win result modes): ``111'', ``222'', ``444'', ``555'', ``666'', ``888'', and ``999'', and some of them overlap. The combination of the performance symbols 70a that announces a jackpot may be a combination of odd numbers, and the combination of performance symbols 70a that announces a hit in which the second starting port 47 opens long may be a combination of even numbers, so that the two do not overlap. .

"Temporary stop" means that the performance symbol 70a slightly swings or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (not completely stopped). ) Refers to the aspect.

"Normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and is a reach with the lowest expectation of jackpot. It has become. In addition, in this embodiment, although a jackpot does not occur with "normal reach", it may be configured such that a jackpot occurs with "normal reach".

"SP Reach" is a super reach performance that is performed after the normal reach and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the normal reach.

"SPSP Reach" is a special reach effect that is performed after the normal reach or after the super reach, and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the super reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special performance more than “SP reach”.

"Full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after a normal reach or a super reach, and is a reach that guarantees a jackpot. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and move at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a more special effect than "SPSP Reach." ing.

The "special performance" is a performance that notifies that a jackpot game or a small win game will be executed by displaying "BONUS approaching" without performing a reach performance. Note that the message "BONUS approaching" may be displayed while performing the reach effect.

"Short Stock Chance Fluctuation" is a second game that aims to execute an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern by passing the game ball through the general gate 44, resulting in almost a big hit or a small hit. A chance effect is performed to notify that it is a chance to increase the second holding memory (U2) (stocking the holding memory) for executing a variable display of special symbols.

"Middle stock chance variation" is aimed at executing an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern by passing the game ball to the regular gate 44 for a longer time than the short stock chance variation. , a chance effect is now performed to notify that it is a chance to increase the second holding memory (U2) (stocking the holding memory) in order to execute a variable display of the second special symbol that is almost a jackpot or a small hit. ing.

"Long stock chance variation" is aimed at executing an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern by passing the game ball to the general gate 44 for a longer time than the middle stock chance variation. , a chance effect is now performed to notify that it is a chance to increase the second holding memory (U2) (stocking the holding memory) in order to execute a variable display of the second special symbol that is almost a jackpot or a small hit. ing.

The first feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is that in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, end of jackpot game). One point is that the figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be switched. By doing so, the special symbols can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to get bored, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is that in the normal gaming state, the special feature varies depending on whether or not the countdown mode is in which a countdown display to the third time-saving gaming state is performed. One point is that the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using a symbol variation pattern determination table. By doing this, it is possible to appeal to the player that the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is approaching by using the variation pattern of the special symbol, and also to switch the variation pattern of the special symbol in accordance with the switching of the production mode. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is that in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is not switched depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to realize a gameplay that is different from the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is that when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the normal gaming state, the reach effect is executed, while in the time-saving gaming state, the special One point is that the reach effect is not executed when the fluctuating display of symbols is executed. By doing this, in the normal game state, the player's attention is drawn to the variable performance that is executed while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and in the time-saving game state, the player is drawn to the variable performance that is executed while the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. This makes it possible to attract people's attention and improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is that in the time-saving gaming state, the variation of the second special symbol A special feature variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be executed when the display results in a jackpot. By doing so, it becomes easier to enhance the production effect when a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is that in the time-saving gaming state, the second special symbol A special feature variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is achieved as a result of the variation display. By doing so, it becomes easier to enhance the production effect when a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table is switched only once, but it may be switched multiple times depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (for example, three times at 250, 500, and 750 times). Alternatively, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table may be switched once or multiple times depending on the number of variations of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state, but it is better to change the pattern in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state. However, it is preferable to make it difficult to switch the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, it is easier to switch the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the normal game state).

In addition, the reach effect may be executed when a variable display of special symbols is executed in the time-saving gaming state, and in this case, even if the judgment results are the same (jackpot, loss), the It is also a good idea to perform a reach effect with a low probability, and it is easier to execute a reach effect when there is a big hit than when there is a small hit. If the game is a hit, the game may not be executed, etc.).

In addition, in the normal gaming state, if there is no jackpot history, the normal special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 21(a) is used, while if there is a jackpot history, the normal However, even if there is no jackpot history, if there is a small win history (such as cases where a small winning game was executed but a jackpot game was not executed) , you may make it use the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal use of FIG.21(b).

(Special figure advance judgment table)
FIG. 23 is a special figure preliminary determination table that is referred to when pre-determining (reading ahead) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole.

Specifically, FIG. 23(a) shows when the main RAM 110c is in the normal gaming state and there is no jackpot history information, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of changes in the special symbol up to the third time-saving gaming state is 23(b) is a normal special symbol preliminary determination table 1 that is referred to when the number of times is 51 or more, and FIG. This is a normal special symbol preliminary determination table 2 that is referred to when the number of variations of the special symbol is 50 times or less.

In addition, FIG. 23(c) is a time-saving special symbol preliminary determination table 1 that is referred to during the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot due to the first special symbol. , FIG. 23(d) shows the time-saving special that is referred to during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) or during the third time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game with the second special symbol. This is a preliminary determination table 2.

As shown in FIG. 23, the special symbol preliminary determination table includes the gaming state, the type of special symbol (starting hole), the determination result of jackpot determination (random value for jackpot determination), and the determination result of special symbol (special symbol). The random number value for determining the pattern), the random number value for determining the reach, the random number value for determining the special pattern variation pattern, the scheduled special pattern variation pattern as a judgment result, and the look-ahead information corresponding to the scheduled special pattern variation pattern are associated. The content of the performance is included for reference.

Therefore, the "scheduled special pattern fluctuation pattern" and "pre-read information" can be said to be things that can identify at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed. . Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbols determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time corresponding to the gaming situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if it is a variable display of the final round of the time saving game state, 8.0 seconds is set, and if it is a variable display other than that, 0.5 seconds is set.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (any one of the first time-saving flag, the second time-saving flag, or the third time-saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process moves to step S320-5 to update the remaining number of time-saving specials (J) and/or the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), and if the time-saving flag is set, the process moves to step S320-5. If not, the process moves to step S320-11 as not to update the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) and/or the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z).

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a saves time, which is the number of times the special symbol is saved in the main RAM 110c, regardless of whether the stopped and displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The remaining number of special symbols (J) is subtracted by "1", and in step S320-6, it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) has become "0". If the remaining number of time-saving special drawings becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-10 as the time-saving gaming state is terminated, and if the remaining number of time-saving special drawings does not become "0", The process moves to step S320-7.

In step S320-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed special symbol is a small winning special symbol. If it is not a small winning special symbol, it is assumed that the end condition of the time-saving gaming state other than a jackpot is not satisfied, and the process moves to step S320-11. If it is a small winning special symbol, the main The remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), which is the number of time-saving small winning games saved in the RAM 110c, is subtracted by "1".

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) has become "0". When the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z) becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-10 as the time-saving gaming state is ended, and the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z) becomes "0". If not, it is assumed that the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state other than a jackpot is not satisfied, and the process moves to step S320-11.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and each remaining time-saving number (remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G)) from the main RAM 110c. Then, the time-saving game state is ended and the game state is shifted to the normal game state.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped and displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-13, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-12, the time-saving flag and each remaining number of time-saving special symbols (remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J ), the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving regular winnings (G)), the time-saving game state is ended, and a transition is made to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of variations saved in the main RAM 110c (the total number of consecutive consecutive loss variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached the specified number (750 times). Determine whether If the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process moves to step S320-14 to start the third time-saving game state, and if the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the third time-saving game state is started. The process moves to step S320-17 as not to start.

In step S320-14, the main CPU 110a stores in the main RAM 110c the remaining number of time savers for the third time saver game state (remaining number of time saver special symbols (J) = 10, remaining number of time saver small winnings (Z) = 3, remaining time saver regular symbols). The number of times (G) = 999) is set, and in step S320-15, a third time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c to transition to the third time saving gaming state, and in step S320-16, a time saving number designation command is sent to the main RAM 110c. Set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a time saving number designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing such as updating the remaining number of time reductions and notifying the remaining number of time reductions.

In step S320-17, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and in step S320-18, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming state corresponding to the current gaming state (the gaming state identified from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag). The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state. When this process is finished, this special symbol variation process ends.

In this way, when the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) becomes "0" during the time-saving gaming state, even if the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z) and the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G) remain. Also, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be ended according to the progress of the game (execution status of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) is subtracted regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a fair game by suppressing the fact that the result of the game becomes advantageous depending on the game method used by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z) becomes "0" during the time-saving gaming state, even if the remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J) and the remaining number of time-saving general drawings (G) remain, The time-saving game states (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) are ended. Therefore, the player tries to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the types of special symbols (combinations of the effects patterns 70a) that are stopped and displayed (by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). Whether the player is aiming for a jackpot or not, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the total number of continuous consecutive displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are executed after the first condition is satisfied (RWM clear) reaches the specified number of times (the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times is a loss result) ), and the total number of continuous consecutive displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol loss fluctuation display executed after the second condition is satisfied (the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0) becomes the specified number of times. When it has been reached (the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times was a loss result), the number of remaining time-saving special symbols (J), the remaining number of time-saving small hits (Z), the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G) ) until any one of ) becomes "0"), it is possible to generate the third time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the surprise that a time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) set when the third time-saving game state occurs is a value greater than the upper limit memory number "4" of the first reservation memory (U1) or the second reservation memory (U2). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the third time-saving game state ends due to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the pending memory stored at the time the third time-saving game state occurs. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set when the third time-saving game state occurs is a value larger than one time. Therefore, after the third time-saving game state occurs, a small winning game is executed without the player understanding the situation, and the third time-saving game state ends without allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 53. It is possible to suppress such inconveniences and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the third time saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, between jackpot games (after the special time-saving gaming state starts or ends), the third time-saving gaming state will not occur again, making it possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor and the player. , it is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the third time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a third time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the third time-saving gaming state has already occurred is set in the main RAM 110c. You may also set it to . In this case, if there is no third time-saving occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (750 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0, a third time-saving gaming state is generated, and the third time-saving occurrence flag is set. If so, it is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 to prevent the third time-saving gaming state from occurring.

In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) was set to 10 times that the third time-saving game state does not end immediately, but the first hold memory (U1) and the second It is sufficient that the number is greater than the upper limit memory number "4" of the reserved memory (U2), and may be greater than or less than 10 times. In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of time-saving small wins was set to 3 times so that the third time-saving game state does not end immediately, but it is only necessary to have more than 1 time, and more than 3 times. It may be more or less. In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of time-saving general drawings (G) is set to 999, but this is different from the remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J) and the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z). It may be any value, and may be more or less than 999 times.

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation processing (when the stop display of special symbols starts), a third time-saving gaming state is generated and various time-saving gaming states are ended, but the special symbol stopping processing (special symbol (at the end of the stop display), a third time-saving game state may be generated or various time-saving game states may be ended.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S330-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol or a loss special symbol), the process moves to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot according to the stop special symbol data (jackpot special symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot control data determination table (see FIG. 26(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process is performed, such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-4, in order to transition to jackpot game process, special figure special electric processing data is changed. "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (it is a loss special symbol), the process moves to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a inputs the stop special symbol data (small winning special symbol) from the big winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game (see FIG. 26(b)) for executing the small winning game. A small winning opening transition process is performed, such as selecting the corresponding small winning game control data (maximum winning number, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-7, in order to transition to a small winning game, the special figure special electric processing data is "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets an opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets an opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, an opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game or the small win game is performed. When this process is finished, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

(control data table)
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for a jackpot game for controlling the big winning opening during a jackpot game (special game), and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for a jackpot game. 26(c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening during a small winning game. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific area control data determination table for.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game includes stop special symbol data for special symbols, the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the types of big prize openings to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize openings to be opened in each round game. The number of times, the opening time of the grand prize opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the grand prize opening is closed after the end of the round game (in order to eject the game ball from the grand prize opening) required time) and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special pattern data is "01", the first jackpot game in which 5 round games are played is executed, and when the stop special pattern data is "02", 5 round games are played. At the same time, a second jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game, and if the stop special symbol data is "03" or "11", 10 round games are executed. At the same time, a third jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special figure data is "12", the remaining 5 round games are played via the small winning game which is the first round game, and the remaining 5 round games are played after the jackpot game than the 3rd jackpot game. A fourth jackpot game in which the state is disadvantageous to the player is executed.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game shown in FIG. When executing a jackpot game (4th to 5th jackpot game) based on , the jackpot game of the maximum round (10 rounds) is more likely to be executed. By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for small winning games includes special symbol stop special symbol data (type of small winning games) and large winning openings to be opened in small winning games. The maximum number of openings, the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the big winning hole in small winning games, the opening time until the big winning hole is changed to the open state, the type of big winning hole to be opened, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening. The opening time of all the big winning openings, the interval time when the big winning opening is closed (the time required to eject the game ball from the big winning opening), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning opening. The ending time until the end is associated.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for small winning games shown in FIG. The time is set for the ball to be rolling on the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 (interval time 0.82 seconds for firing interval 0.67 seconds). By doing this, the opening time of the first big prize opening 50 can be shortened, and the opening time of the first big prize opening 50 can be shortened. It is possible to increase the number of times the winning opening is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes special symbol stop special symbol data (type of small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of openings, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small winning game, regardless of the type of the small winning game, a specific area 53 is converted into an open state when a large winning opening in the small winning game is opened, and the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state when the large winning opening is closed.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small win game shown in FIG. One point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific area 53 is set so that the specific area 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can play the small winning game with peace of mind, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1), it is set to 50%. The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, multiple types of small winning games are provided, and depending on the type of small winning games, a specific area is set so that the game ball that enters the first large prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1). When opening and closing 53 (for example, in a second small winning game), the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4). It is also possible to provide a case where the player is allowed to play the game (for example, a third small winning game).

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing jackpot game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the set opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and an in-round flag indicating that a round game is in progress is set in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-round flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the round game is in progress, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the jackpot game. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) are determined from the control data of the jackpot game. Specify the opening time of the second grand prize opening 56), and use the opening time of the grand prize opening and the drive data of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) as the main Set it in RAM110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current opening of the big prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round game, and whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning hole is specified. time) is set in the main RAM 110c, and at the same time, the drive data for the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied. Specifically, the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 50 or second grand prize opening 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or It is determined whether the opening time of the final opening has elapsed. If the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-11, and if the conditions for transition to the interval are not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big prize opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning prize set in the main RAM 110c is Clear the drive data of the mouth solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an interval in-between flag indicating that the round is in progress is set. When the interval transition process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current interval is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-14, and if the interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Furthermore, a round game flag is set in place of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the during-interval flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an ending-in-progress flag indicating that an ending is in progress is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing an ending performance corresponding to the current jackpot game or small win game is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S340-20, and if the ending is not in progress, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special figure special electric processing data is stored in order to move the processing to the jackpot game end processing. is set to "5", and the current jackpot game process ends.

(Small winning game processing on main control board)
The small winning game process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the small winning game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game in progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c, which indicates that the opening/closing game is in progress to open and close the big prize opening, and if the opening time has not elapsed, then , the current small winning game process ends.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is in progress with the opening/closing of the big prize opening. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process moves to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening or interval of the small winning game has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole ( Specify the opening time of the first grand prize opening 50 or the second grand prize opening 56), and determine the opening time of the grand prize opening and the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 are satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening timing of the specific area 53 specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 26(c) (here, the opening timing of the big prize opening) has come. If the opening condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-8, and if the opening condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the closing timing of the specific area 53 (here, the closing timing of the big prize opening) specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 26(c) has come. If the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-10, and if the closing condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. Clear the drive data of the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the opening/closing game flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small winning game Finish the process.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game, and the process moves to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game is to be executed, and the specific area passing flag is saved. If not, the process moves to step S350-19 assuming that the ending is executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs jackpot game transfer processing in step S350-17. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of winnings, Opening time, etc.), select the time-saving flag saved in the main RAM 110c and each remaining time-saving number (remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J), remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), remaining number of time-saving general drawings (G)) Processing is performed such as clearing the time-saving gaming state to end the time-saving gaming state and transitioning to the normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state).

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the small winning game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending production corresponding to the current small winning game (during the small winning game, more specifically, during the opening/closing game). Processing will be performed to execute a regret notification effect (such as a regret notification effect to notify that the vehicle did not pass).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the ending time set in step S350-19 is greater than or equal to "0". If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S350-22, and if the ending is not in progress, the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small hit game process is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric signal is sent to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process. After setting the processing data to "0", the current small winning game processing is ended.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 openings of the first big prize opening or winning of 10 game balls). The jackpot game is not executed until it is done. Therefore, the player is not put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed without performing the ending of the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game will not be extended, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the jackpot game may be executed after the small win game ends.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special symbol data saved in the main RAM 110c in step S360-1, and determines whether the stop special symbol data is a jackpot special symbol in step S360-2. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S360-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol), the process moves to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, sets the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot. The first game state setting table (see FIG. 30(a)) for the game is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information when passing through the specific area saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, determines the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information when passing through the specific area. The second gaming state setting table (see FIG. 30(b)) for setting is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired gaming state information etc. with the selected gaming state setting table and sets the gaming state flags (normal flag, first time saving flag, second time saving flag) as the gaming state after the jackpot game. flag), the remaining number of time savings (remaining number of time saving special drawings (J), remaining number of time saving small winnings (Z), remaining number of time saving general drawings (G)) are determined and set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8. , a game state designation command corresponding to the game state flag is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

In this way, at the end of the jackpot game executed when the game ball passed the specific area 53 during the small win game, based on the game state when the game ball passed the specific area during the small win game, It is possible to perform predetermined processing (specifically, processing of determining gaming conditions after a jackpot game (gaming status, number of time reductions, remaining number of small winnings), and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 110c). It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (setting the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur in the actual game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, predetermined processing (specifically, the gaming conditions after the jackpot game (game status, time saving number, small It is possible to perform processing such as determining the remaining number of wins (remaining number of wins) and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be varied depending on whether it is a jackpot game via a small win game or a jackpot game without passing through a small win game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, the predetermined process is not performed based on the gaming state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the gaming state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may also be performed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing a first gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the gaming state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and settings. (a normal flag indicating that the game is in the normal gaming state, a first time-saving flag indicating that the game is in the first time-saving game state, a second time-saving flag indicating that the game is in the second time-saving game state), The remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), which is the number of variable displays of special symbols that end the gaming state, the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (G), which is the number of small winning games that end the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state. The remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G), which is the number of fluctuating displays of the regular symbol that ends the regular symbols, is associated with the remaining number of time-saving symbols (G).

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that there are jackpot games that do not enter the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (first jackpot game), and jackpot games that enter the time-saving gaming state (second to fourth jackpot games). One point is that there is a game (games). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the types of jackpot games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) is set when the game is executed in the time-saving gaming state, rather than the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) that is set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state. One of the points is that there are jackpot games (second jackpot game, third jackpot game, fourth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) is larger. By doing so, it is possible to vary the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set depending on the type of jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that the remaining number of time-saving regular games (G) is set when the game is executed in the time-saving game state, rather than the remaining number of time-saving regular games (G) that is set when the game is performed in the normal game state. One point is that there is a jackpot game (fourth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of time-saving regular maps (G) is greater than the remaining number of times (G). By doing this, it is possible to vary the remaining number of time-saving regular cards (G) set depending on the type of jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that in the time-saving gaming state, the number of normal symbol changes (the number of occurrences of the first gaming event) is a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times, in other words, G= 0), the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of occurrences of the second game event) has reached the predetermined number (5 times, in other words, J = 0), and the small winning game is determined to be executed. Based on the number of hit determinations (the number of occurrences of the third gaming event) reaching a predetermined number (Z=0), it is possible to end the time-saving gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to when the time-saving game state will end, and also to select the type of small winning game (type of jackpot game) that is directly connected to the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the act of causing a jackpot game to be executed, which harms a fair game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. The point is that the number of variations of the special symbol to be terminated (the number of occurrences of the second game event = 5 times) is set to be smaller. By doing this, in order to prevent the time-saving game state from ending prematurely, the player can perform the variable display of the normal symbols rather than the variable display of the special symbols, and the game quality of the time-saving game state is unprecedented. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that the number of changes in the special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state (the number of occurrences of the second gaming event = 5 times) is set in the pending memory (first pending memory), The point is that the value is larger than the upper limit storage number "4" of the second reservation storage). By doing this, the first pending memory (U1) that may remain when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is digested, and the time-saving gaming state ends early. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience that would otherwise occur, and to improve the interest of the game.

There is only one type of time saving special symbol remaining number, which is the number of variable displays of the special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, but for example, 1 time saving, which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state. A remaining number of special symbols (J1) and a second remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J2), which is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state, may be provided, or in addition, the number of times the time-saving gaming state is ended. A third time-saving special symbol remaining number of times (J3) may be provided, which is the total number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even in this case, each of the remaining times J1 to J3 of time-saving special symbols may be set to a smaller value than the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols.

In addition, if a jackpot game (first to third jackpot game) that does not go through a small win game is executed, the game state (normal game state or time-saving game state) before the jackpot game is executed. If the number of variable displays of the special symbol that ends the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols) does not change regardless, and a jackpot game (1V to 3V jackpot game) via a small win game is executed. In this case, the number of variable displays of the special symbol for ending the normal time-saving game state (second time-saving number) may be changed depending on the game state before the execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, a time-saving game state may be generated after all the jackpot games are completed, or in connection with providing a plurality of small winning games, a plurality of jackpot games that go through the small winning games are provided, and the first small winning game After the end of the jackpot game via the second small win game, the time saving game state may not be generated, and after the end of the jackpot game via the second small win game, the time saving game state may be generated.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, and FIG. 31(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. , FIG. 31(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final change: remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J)>0), and FIG. It is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a gaming state (final fluctuation: remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) = 0).

Regarding the gaming state that is referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (playing state, number of time savings, number of remaining small winnings) at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, the timing when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won) ).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won. The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final change: remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) > 0), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, At the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won, the gaming conditions (gaming state, various time saving numbers, remaining number of small winnings) are set with reference to the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final variation: remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) = 0), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, T1 At the start of the jackpot fluctuation display, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won, the gaming conditions (gaming state, various time saving numbers, remaining number of small winnings) are set by referring to the gaming state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation display is started. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small winning game, and FIG. 32(a) is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. Yes, and FIG. 32(b) is a timing chart when a small win fluctuation display is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not satisfied in the time-saving gaming state (remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z)>0), and FIG. 32(c) ) is a timing chart when a small win fluctuation display is executed to satisfy the time saving end condition in the time saving gaming state (remaining number of time saving small wins (Z)=0).

Regarding the game state that is referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number, remaining number of small winnings) at the end of the jackpot game via the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game. The timing is when the game is played (the time of transition to the jackpot game).

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the small winning variation display is executed in the normal gaming state, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game at T4 at the end of the jackpot game at T6. The gaming condition at the time of the game is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal gaming state has been in place since the start of the small win fluctuation display, the timing of T4 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), if the time-saving end condition is not satisfied in the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) > 0) and the small win fluctuation display is executed, the jackpot game at T6 ends. At the time, the game condition (game condition, various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the game state when the game ball passes the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4. In this case, when the small win fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, the various time saving numbers and the remaining number of small winnings are not "0" and the time saving gaming state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is called the time saving gaming state. It turns out. Incidentally, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game starts and shifts to the normal gaming state, but when passing the specific area 53, it is called a time-saving gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), when the small win fluctuation display is executed to satisfy the time saving end condition in the time saving game state (remaining number of time saving small wins (Z) = 0), the jackpot game of T6 ends. At the time, the game condition (game condition, various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the game state when the game ball passes the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4. In this case, when the small winning fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, so the timing of T4 is called the normal gaming state. It turns out.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, when the jackpot game ends, there are cases where the jackpot fluctuation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed, and cases where the small win fluctuation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed. The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the gaming state referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (gaming state, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(General control board control process)
Referring to FIG. 33, the general electric power control process of the main control board 110 will be explained. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose electric power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electricity processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electricity processing data, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute this to end the current regular electricity control process.

Specifically, if the general pattern/universal electric processing data = 0, the process for executing the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol based on the reserved memory (common pattern judgment information) and the general pattern/universal electric processing data are set to "1". A normal symbol variation process (step S410) is executed to perform a process of changing to a normal symbol. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general figure general electric power processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner, the processing for changing the general electric figure general electric power processing data to "0", etc. are performed. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. If the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S410-19, and if the normal symbols are not in the variable display mode, the process moves to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of ordinary drawings pending memory (F) is 1 or more. If the normal symbol pending memory (F) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S410-3, and if the normal symbol pending memory (F) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the general figure reservation memory (F) and updates it. A reservation number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of reserved symbols is sent to the performance control board 130, and the image display device displays a reservation corresponding to the reserved symbol memory (F) (display of a reserved symbol of a symbol, display of a number of reserved symbols display area) ) will be carried out.

In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 is updated, and a performance is performed according to the updated game state.

In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol retention storage area, and shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections to the previous memory. shift to the department.

For example, the ordinary figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the ordinary figure determination information retention storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the ordinary figure determination information retention storage area. In addition, the ordinary figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the ordinary figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th memory part, which is the ordinary figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th memory part. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-7. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 35(a)), it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the gaming state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the normal symbol execution storage area. decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 35(b)), the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the gaming state, the hit determination result, and the random number value for normal symbol determination. Determine the stop pattern data of the symbol. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination processing. Specifically, using the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 35(c) or 35(d)) according to the gaming state, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the gaming state, the hit determination result, and the random value of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for displaying the normal symbols in a fluctuating manner is determined. In addition, the details of the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a sets a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the general pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the common figure variation pattern.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The symbol fluctuation display is started, and the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 62 by being output in the output control process of step S800. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (any one of the first time-saving flag, the second time-saving flag, or the third time-saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process moves to step S410-15 to update the remaining number of time-saving programs (G), and if the time-saving flag is not set, the remaining number of time-saving programs (G) is updated. G) is not updated, and the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the remaining number of time-saving symbols (G), which is the number of time-saving symbols saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S420-16, the remaining number of time-saving symbols is reduced by 1. It is determined whether (G) has become "0". When the remaining number of time-saving game cards (G) becomes "0", the process moves to step S410-17 to end the time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of time-saving game cards (G) becomes "0". If not, it is assumed that the end condition of the time-saving gaming state is not satisfied, and the process moves to step S410-18.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and each remaining time-saving number (remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G)) from the main RAM 110c. Then, the time-saving game state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal game state, and the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets a time saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining time saving number (G) of the normal symbol, which is the remaining time saving number of normal symbols, in the performance electrical equipment data storage area. As a result, a time saving number specifying command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the remaining time saving number of normal symbols. When this process is finished, the current normal symbol variation process is finished.

In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-20, and in step S410-21 , a normal symbol confirmation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the production control board 130.

In step S410-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (winning winning). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended, and if it is a winning normal symbol, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 37(f)) in step S410-23. Obtain auxiliary game control data to play. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-24, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game has started on the production control board 130.

In step S410-25, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-23 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-26, sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-23 to the general figure and general electric processing data. Set "1" and end the current normal symbol variation process.

In this way, when the remaining number of time-saving general drawings (G) becomes "0" during the time-saving gaming state, even if the remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J) and the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z) remain. Also, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel gameplay in which the time-saving gaming state ends not with the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol where the jackpot determination is performed, but with the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with which the jackpot determination is not performed. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0" during the time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is ended, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, or when the stop time The time-saving game state is ended not when the period of time has elapsed, but when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started (immediately after the start). Therefore, regardless of the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the time-saving gaming state can be ended at a timing that is easy for the player to grasp, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when a variable display of normal symbols is executed, a gaming state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 in the same way as when a variable display of special symbols is executed. It has become. Therefore, when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state due to the remaining number of time-saving regular maps (G) becoming "0", by notifying the performance control board 130 of the game state, the game state can be changed according to the game state. It is possible to perform performances and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is a normal game state in which the normal pattern variation effect that involves the variable display of the effect pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the normal pattern is not executed, or it is accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the normal pattern. Regardless of whether you are in the time-saving gaming state where the normal symbol fluctuation effect is executed, if the normal symbol variable display is executed, the commands related to the normal symbol variable display (normal symbol designation command, common symbol fluctuation pattern designation) command). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is being executed on the performance control board 130, and it is possible to execute a performance (for example, a fluctuating display of the special symbol TZ) in accordance with the fluctuating display of the regular symbol. becomes.

In addition, when the time-saving special symbol remaining number (J) becomes "0" during the time-saving gaming state and ending the time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol's fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The time-saving gaming state is supposed to end, but if the time-saving normal symbol remaining number (G) becomes "0" and the time-saving gaming state is ended, the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the normal symbol The time-saving game state may be ended when is stopped and displayed, or the time-saving game state may be ended when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed.

In addition, the game state specification command is sent before updating the remaining number of time-saving games (G), but after updating the remaining number of time-saving games (G), that is, after the gaming state changes. A gaming state designation command may be transmitted in

In addition, a command indicating the remaining number of time-saving special programs (G) is sent as a time-saving number designation command, but not only the remaining number of time-saving regular programs (G), but also the remaining number of time-saving special programs (J) and time-saving special programs are sent. A command including the remaining number of short and small wins (Z) may be transmitted.

In this way, the number of commands (gaming state designation command, normal symbol designation command, normal symbol fluctuation pattern The number of commands sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving gaming state (gaming state specification command, normal symbol specification command, normal symbol) Fluctuation pattern specification command, time saving number specification command) are more common. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately grasp the remaining number of time reductions on the performance control board 130, and it becomes possible to perform processing such as notifying the remaining number of time reductions.

(Hit judgment table for normal symbols)
FIG. 35(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining a hit based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols corresponds to the gaming state when performing the hit determination, the random number value for hit determination, and the determination result of the hit determination (win, loss). The approximate probability of winning is listed in the far right column for reference.

A "win" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "loss" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will not be executed.

The first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 35(a) is that the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit is the same regardless of the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the probability (proportion) of being determined to be a hit may be higher in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state (generating a normal pattern probability variation).

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG. 35(b) is a normal symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a normal symbol based on the ordinary symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the ordinary symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), the normal symbol determination table includes the gaming state at the time of determination, the determination result of the hit determination (win, loss), the random number value for determining the winning symbol, and the normal symbol determination table. The determination result, the stopped ordinary symbol data indicating the determination result, and the ordinary symbol designation command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a loss normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" and the normal symbol "2" are auxiliary games in which the second starting port 47 is opened short once at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (almost no prizes, no prizes at all) depending on the game state, or , the second starting hole 47 is a normal winning symbol in which an auxiliary game in which the game ball is opened long twice at a time value that makes it easy to win a prize is executed.
The normal symbol "3" is a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened long twice at a time value that makes it easy to win a game ball regardless of the game state.

The first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 35(b) is that the number of types of normal symbols that are stopped and displayed differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to vary the gameplay related to the normal symbols depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the types of normal symbols that are stopped and displayed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state may be the same. In this case, for example, even if normal symbols 2 and 3 are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed in the same manner as normal symbol 1 so that the normal gaming state is more disadvantageous than the time-saving gaming state. It is better to do this.

(Public figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 35(c) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of normal symbols in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 35(d) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the time-saving gaming state. This is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving that is referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the gaming state, the judgment result of the hit determination, the type of normal symbol, the random value of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, The type of normal pattern fluctuation pattern that is the determination result is associated with the fluctuation time of each normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and the presentation content and average fluctuation time are listed for reference.

As for the performance contents shown in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d), "normal fluctuation" and "shortened fluctuation" mean that the three performance symbols 70a fluctuate at high speed and reach. This means that a fluctuating effect is executed in which the display stops and displays at random losing numbers.

"Chance variation" is a production that suggests that there is a chance to win (an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time is executed) when the three production symbols 70a are fluctuating and displaying at high speed; Specifically, the validity period of the performance button 17 occurs, and an operation performance that notifies the judgment result according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period (in the case of a win, the first movable member 73a moves to the performance position). After descending to reach position, the three performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a state that they are aligned, and in the case of a loss, the first movable member 73a does not operate and the three performance symbols are stopped and displayed with a reach loss. This means that the variable performance to be performed will be executed.

"Loss disguise fluctuation" is caused by the execution of an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens short at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (practically does not win) even though it is a win. This means that a fluctuating performance is executed in which the three performance symbols 70a fluctuate at a high speed and are stopped and displayed at random losing numbers without becoming a reach.

In addition, if the fluctuating display of the normal symbol when the remaining number of time saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0" and ending the time saving gaming state is a loss, or if the game ball is difficult to win in the second starting opening 47. In the case of a win that opens with a short opening pattern (which does not actually win a prize), a series of advantageous sections that are advantageous to the player (a jackpot game called the so-called first win or a win that is advantageous to the player starting from the third time-saving game state) A result display is made to show the results of the game (the number of successive jackpot games, the number of balls put out, etc.) during the period in which the state continues.

The first feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that the variable effect by the effect symbol 70a is not executed during the variable display of the normal symbol (the auxiliary game is not executed). In the normal game state (the second starting port 47 does not open long), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is the same regardless of whether it is a loss or a win. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the amount of data for performing the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal gaming state, and it becomes possible to efficiently control the variable display of the normal symbols. Furthermore, the players are not made to have excessive expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that the game ball is short at the time value at which it is difficult to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially no winning). When the opening auxiliary game is executed, a loss disguise variation is executed in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed separately to disguise a loss. By doing this, when an auxiliary game is executed in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially no prize is won), the player is not made to look forward to it, and the interest of the game increases. It becomes possible to improve the

The third feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that in the time-saving gaming state, there is a possibility that the game ball will open long enough to easily enter the second starting port 47. In some cases, a chance variation is executed in response to the player's operation of the performance button 17 (occurrence of the valid period). By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect in the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 in the time-saving gaming state (substantially no winning). When an auxiliary game that opens a short circuit based on the time value is executed, a performance that suggests a disadvantageous result for the player (a loss disguise variation in which three performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed at different losing numbers) is executed, while an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened long at a time value in which it is easy for the game ball to win (almost wins) is executed, the result is advantageous to the player. One point is that a suggested performance (chance variation in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed in a state) is executed. By doing this, an auxiliary game in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 is executed, and an auxiliary game in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 is executed. This makes it easier to distinguish between different cases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 in the time-saving gaming state (substantially no winning). The combination of performance symbols that are stopped and displayed when the auxiliary game that opens the short circuit based on the time value is executed (a losing result in which the three performance symbols 70a are separated) and the second starting opening 47 make it easy to win the game ball. The combination of performance symbols that are stopped and displayed when a long-release auxiliary game is executed with a time value of (almost winning) (a winning result in which three performance symbols 70a are aligned) is different. There are several points. By doing this, an auxiliary game in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 is executed, and an auxiliary game in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 is executed. This makes it easier to distinguish between different cases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that in the time-saving gaming state, the variation display (variable performance) of the normal symbols executed in the normal gaming state is It is possible to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols (fluctuation effect) with a time value longer than the time value (5 seconds), but the average fluctuation time of the fluctuating display of normal symbols is the average fluctuation of the fluctuating display of normal symbols in the normal gaming state. One point is that it is shorter than the time. By doing this, it becomes easier to arouse the expectations of the player in the time-saving gaming state, and it is also possible to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols in a manner that is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols differs depending on the type of time-saving gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to bring out the characteristics of each time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state. There are several points. By doing so, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that when determining the fluctuation pattern of special symbols, a predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear, jackpot game ends). It is possible to switch the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed reaches a predetermined number of times, whereas when determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols during the normal gaming state or time-saving gaming state. , the switching of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control when performing a variable display of normal symbols. Furthermore, while it is possible to enhance the variable display of special symbols that are directly connected to a jackpot, it is also possible to make the variable display of normal symbols that are not directly connected to a jackpot game simple and easy to understand, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

The tenth feature of the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern for determining the fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. One point is that it is possible to switch the judgment table. By doing so, there is a normal gaming state in which the second starting port 47 is opened only in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a game ball (substantially no winning), and a long opening pattern in which the second starting port 47 is easy to win. It is possible to differentiate the game with the time-saving game state that can be opened in the game mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that the special symbol used to display the loss variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is One point is that the number of types of normal symbol variation patterns (two types) used for normal symbol loss variation display in the time-saving game state is greater than the number of variation patterns (one type each). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state where the variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that the special symbol used to display the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is The average fluctuation time due to the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol used for the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the time saving game state is longer than the average fluctuation time due to the fluctuation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state where the variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(d) is that in the time-saving gaming state, the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern used for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol The point is that there are more types (three types) of the normal symbol variation patterns used for the normal symbol win variation display in the time-saving gaming state than there are (one type each). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state where the variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case where an auxiliary game is executed in which the short circuit is opened at a time value in which it is a hit and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially no winning), the chance effect is not executed. However, a chance effect may be executed. In this case, the chance effect is executed at a different rate than in the case of a loss or the case of a hit and the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time at a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win. It's good to do that. Specifically, the chance effect may be executed at a lower rate than in the case of a loss, or the chance effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a loss, but it is a win and the second starting hole 47 is a game ball. The chance performance may be executed at a lower rate than when an auxiliary game with a long opening is executed at an easy time value.

Further, although there is only one type of chance performance, multiple types may be provided by making the operation mode of the performance button 17 different. In the case of the first chance performance, whether the performance button 17 is single-pressed during the valid period or not. , The determination result is notified when the valid period has elapsed, and in the case of a second chance performance, the determination result is notified by repeatedly pressing the performance button 17 a predetermined number of times during the valid period, or when the valid period has elapsed. The rate at which the first chance effect is executed and the rate at which the second chance effect is executed when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened long at a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win is executed. The ratio may be made different (for example, the second chance performance is easier to execute than the first chance performance, or vice versa).

Further, in the chance production, the production pattern 70a does not form a ready-to-reach state, but an operation production (decision production) that generates the validity period with the ready-to-reach state formed may be performed, or a chance production may be performed. The reach variation performance may be performed separately from the performance. In this case, there are two cases: a loss, a case where a auxiliary game is executed in which the short circuit is opened at a time value in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially no winning); The execution rate of the reach variation performance may be made different depending on the case where an auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is released long at a time value that makes it easy to enter the second starting opening 47. Specifically, the case where the auxiliary game is executed in which the short circuit is opened at a time value in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially does not win) is more likely than in the case of a loss. , the reach variation effect may be executed at a lower rate, or the time value may be set such that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially no prize) than in the case of a loss. The rate is higher when an auxiliary game that opens short is executed, but compared to when an auxiliary game that opens long is executed at a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to hit the second starting port 47. Also, when it is a hit and the auxiliary game in which the game ball opens short at a time value in which it is difficult to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially does not win) is executed, the reach variation effect is executed at a lower rate. You may also do so.

In addition, although the same regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving is used to determine the regular pattern fluctuation pattern regardless of the type of time saving gaming state, a separate regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is used for each type of time saving gaming state. may be provided to determine the normal figure fluctuation pattern, or a time-saving game state that goes through the jackpot game (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and a time-saving game state that does not go through the jackpot game (third time-saving game state). A separate regular pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table may be provided for each type of time-saving gaming state to determine the regular pattern fluctuation pattern, or a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving may be provided for each type of time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to determine a general figure fluctuation pattern.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 35(e) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of normal winning symbol.

As shown in FIG. 35(e), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop game data, the number of openings of the second starting port 47, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , the first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated, and the 2. The long opening ratio of the starting port 47 is described.

For example, in the first time-saving game state, if the stop game data is "01", the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is 1, and it is difficult to win the game ball (substantially (No) If the auxiliary game in which the short circuit is opened for 0.07 seconds is executed and the stop game data is "03", the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is 2, and the game ball does not win. A long opening auxiliary game is performed for an easy 3 seconds (total 6 seconds).

As a first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. ) Only the auxiliary game that is short-released with a time value is executed, and when the auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state, the auxiliary game that is long-released with a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47. One point is that it is now possible to implement. By doing this, the game ball basically does not enter the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 47 in the time-saving gaming state, so the gaming state The gameplay can be varied depending on the type of game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that the auxiliary game is released at a time value (long release pattern) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the second starting port 47 depending on the type of time-saving game state. The difference is that the probabilities (proportions) that the game balls will be executed are different, that is, the probabilities that the game ball will land in the second starting hole 47 and the jackpot game via the small win will be executed are different. By doing so, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state that go through the jackpot game, and the third time-saving game state that does not go through the jackpot game, The probabilities (proportions) that the auxiliary game will be executed in which the game ball is released at a time value (long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 are different. The difference is that the probability of executing a jackpot game via a small win is different. By doing so, the gameplay of the time-saving game state can be varied depending on whether or not the player has played through the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that even if the winning normal symbol (for example, normal symbol 01) is the same, the game ball may be placed in the second starting port 47 depending on the type of time-saving gaming state. An auxiliary game in which a short opening is performed at a time value that makes winning a prize difficult (substantially no winning), and an auxiliary game in which a game ball is released at a time value that makes it easy to win a prize (long opening pattern) in the second starting port 47. There are cases where this is executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a variety of gameplay without drastically increasing the types of winning symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e), regardless of the type of time-saving game state, the game ball is released into the second starting port 47 at a time value (long release pattern) that makes it easy to win. One point is that a normal winning symbol (normal symbol 03) is set when the auxiliary game is executed. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the types of winning and normal symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the normal symbol 02 and the normal symbol 03 are determined in the normal gaming state, and even in the normal gaming state, the time value (long An auxiliary game that is released in the opening pattern) may be executed, that is, a game ball may enter the second starting hole 47 and a jackpot game via a small win may be executed.

In addition, when an auxiliary game is executed in which a game ball is released into the second starting port 47 at a time value (long opening pattern) that makes it easy to win, the second starting port 47 is opened twice. , the long opening may be performed for 6 seconds with one opening, or the long opening may be performed more than twice for a total of 6 seconds, or the second starting port 47 may be opened multiple times (2 When opening the second starting port 47 (including opening times), the opening time of the second starting port 47 is different for each opening time (for example, if opening twice, the first time is 2 seconds and the second time is 4 seconds, etc.). , or vice versa).

In addition, there is a case where an auxiliary game in which the short circuit is opened at a time value at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially no winning) and a time value at which the game ball enters the second starting port 47 is easy to enter the prize. (long opening pattern), the opening time and ending time of the auxiliary game are the same, but the time value ( When an auxiliary game in which a game ball is opened short at a time value in which it is difficult to enter the second starting port 47 (substantially does not win) is executed than in a case where an auxiliary game in which the game ball is opened in a long opening pattern) is executed. The opening time and/or ending time of the auxiliary game may be shorter in this case.

(Fuzu advance judgment table)
FIG. 36 is a common figure preliminary determination table that is referred to when pre-determining (pre-reading) the common figure determination information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the common figure gate.

Specifically, FIG. 36(a) is a normal normal pattern pre-determination table that is referred to when performing the normal pattern pre-reading process in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 36(b) is a normal pattern advance determination table in the time-saving gaming state This is a time-saving ordinary figure preliminary determination table that is referred to when executing ordinary figure pre-reading processing.

As shown in FIG. 36, the normal pattern preliminary determination table includes the gaming state, the judgment result of hit judgment, the normal pattern judgment result (stopped normal pattern data), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random value, and the judgment result. The regular figure scheduled variation pattern is associated with the look-ahead information corresponding to the regular figure scheduled variation pattern, and the production contents are described for reference.

Therefore, it can be said that the "scheduled variation pattern of ordinary symbols" and "pre-reading information" can specify at least the type of ordinary symbol, the result of the hit judgment, the type of ordinary symbol, and the fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols scheduled to be executed. . In addition, although the details will be described later, since the auxiliary game is normally executed depending on the type of symbol, the types of auxiliary games (auxiliary game where the second starting port 47 opens short, auxiliary game where the second starting port 47 opens long) ) can be said to be specifiable.

(Customer waiting control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

In step S450-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current game is a jackpot game or a small win game. If a jackpot game or a small win game is in progress, the process moves to step S450-10, and if a jackpot game or a small win game is not in progress, in step S450-2, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Determine whether If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S450-10, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, in step S450-3, the first pending memory (U1) and the second pending memory are stored. (U2) are both "0". If it is not "0", the process moves to step S450-10, and if it is "0", the process moves to step S450-4.

In step S450-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal gaming state is currently in progress. If it is in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that it is in the customer waiting state and the process moves to step S450-7. If it is not in the normal gaming state (it is in the time-saving gaming state), in step S450-5, the normal symbols are displayed. Determine whether or not a variable display is in progress. If the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the process moves to step S450-10, and if the normal symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner, in step S450-6, the regular symbol pending memory (F) is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not. If it is "0", it is assumed that the customer is waiting and the process moves to step S450-7, and if it is not "0", the process moves to step S450-10.

In step S450-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the current customer waiting control process is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process moves to step S450-8.

In step S450-8, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S450-9, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current customer waiting control process ends. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent to the performance control board 130 to appeal to players (customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage players to play). Processing will be performed to perform adjustment guidance effects, etc. for guiding operations for adjusting volume and light intensity.

In addition, if you are in the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state, the adjustment guidance performance will be executed after 5 seconds have elapsed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance will be performed after 60 seconds have elapsed, but in the time-saving gaming state. When the system is in a customer waiting state, an adjustment guidance performance is executed after 5 seconds have elapsed, and a customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after 120 seconds have elapsed.

In step S450-10, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and ends the current customer waiting control process.

In this way, when in the normal gaming state, even if the fluctuating display of normal symbols is being executed or the number of pending symbols is not "0", there is a waiting time for customers to appeal to players. It is possible to perform performances (such as a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage players to play, an adjustment guide performance to guide the adjustment operations of volume and light intensity, etc.). Therefore, the performance while waiting for a customer can be performed at an appropriate timing according to the gaming situation, and it is possible to exert the desired appeal effect to the players.

In addition, when in the time-saving gaming state, if a fluctuating display of normal symbols is being executed, or if the number of pending symbols is not "0", a customer waiting effect to appeal to players is displayed. (Customer waiting demo performance to encourage players to play, adjustment guidance performance to guide the adjustment operations of volume and light intensity, etc.) is not executed, and the fluctuating display of normal symbols is not executed and the normal symbols are put on hold. If the number is "0", the performance while waiting for a customer can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the performance while waiting for a customer at an appropriate timing that suits the gaming situation (in a state where the fluctuating display of normal symbols, which is important in the time-saving gaming state, is not executed), and it has the desired appeal effect to the players. It becomes possible to demonstrate.

In addition, the execution of the performance while waiting for a customer is more restricted when the player becomes waiting for a customer during the time-saving gaming state than when the player becomes waiting for a customer during the normal gaming state (customer waiting state). (The time it takes for the wait demo effect to run is longer). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the waiting-for-customer mode in accordance with the time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the player is highly likely to have secured the gaming machine.

In addition, even during the normal gaming state, if the normal symbol is being displayed fluctuating or the number of reserved symbols is not "0", the customer waiting performance may not be executed, or during the time-saving gaming state. Alternatively, the performance while waiting for a customer may not be executed, or one of the adjustment guidance performance and the demonstration performance while waiting for a customer may be prevented from being performed during the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, during the normal gaming state, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, execution of the performance while waiting for a customer is restricted, and in the time-saving gaming state, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. It may also be possible to perform a performance while waiting for a customer.

(Timing chart when the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game)
FIG. 38 is a timing chart when the time saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game.

First, at timing T1, a variable display of a special symbol that becomes a jackpot is started. At this time, since it is in the normal gaming state, all information such as the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play to calculate the normal base value, and the total number of outs to set the playing section are not collected. It is running.

Next, at timing T2, a fluctuating display of the winning normal symbols is started. This fluctuation display is performed in a normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

After that, at timing T3, the stop display of the special symbol starts, and at timing T4, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for jackpot) of the special symbol has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) starts, and the right As soon as the hit indicator 67 lights up, output of a jackpot signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is started. Additionally, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value will stop, and the aggregation (count) of the total number of outs for setting the gaming section will continue (normal base value calculation and display of normal base value will also continue).

Then, at the timing T5, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a game ball (substantially no winning).

Further, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second start opening 47, and a variable display of the normal symbols that results in a loss is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern fluctuating pattern.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, it becomes a standby state, and at the timing of T10, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols that become a hit starts. be done. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern fluctuating pattern. Then, at timing T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, time-saving game states (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) are started, and output of the jackpot signal is stopped.

Also, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the jackpot game (low probability non-probability). Since it was started during the time-saving game state), an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a game ball (substantially no winning).

Next, at timing T14, the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second start opening 47, and a variable display of normal symbols that becomes a win (first time in the time-saving game state) is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal pattern fluctuating pattern for time-saving.

Thereafter, at timing T15, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at timing T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the second starting port 47 is not activated when the game ball is difficult to win. An auxiliary game in which the game is opened in a short release pattern (short release) is executed. Then, at timing T17, when the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second start opening 47, a variable display of normal symbols that result in a loss (second time in the time-saving game state) is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the time-saving gaming state, it is performed in the normal pattern fluctuating pattern for time-saving. Further, at the timing of T18, the stop display of the normal symbols is started.

Here, we have shown an example in which the time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, but even if the time-saving gaming state occurs while the normal symbols are being displayed in a stopped state or during an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol will not be displayed. It is performed from a variable display to a regular pattern to save time.

In this way, when the time-saving gaming state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving gaming state occurs after a predetermined period of time has passed after the stop display of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot ends (after the end of the jackpot game). It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage during the jackpot game, and it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the game parlor side and the player side.

In addition, if the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game in the low-probability time-saving game state will start after a predetermined period before the time-saving game state occurs (the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has elapsed) The right-hand hit indicator 67 is turned on from when the ball is played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages due to the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game in the low-probability time-saving game state will start after a predetermined period before the time-saving game state occurs (the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has elapsed) ), the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value are not possible. Since this is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, if the time-saving game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined period before the time-saving game state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game that is in the low-probability time-saving game state after the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has passed) From this point on, an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs during the fluctuating display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the fluctuating display according to the time-saving regular symbol fluctuating pattern will be started from the next fluctuating display of the regular symbol. is now being carried out. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, a variable display based on a time-saving normal symbol variation pattern is performed from the next normal symbol variation display, and a time-saving release pattern is performed from the next auxiliary game. Then, the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened will be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variable display control of the normal symbols or the control of the auxiliary game midway due to the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

(Timing chart when the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of time-saving special symbols becomes 0)
FIG. 39 is a timing chart when the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) becomes 0 and the time-saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is the final round in the time-saving gaming state, is started. At this time, since the game is in a time-saving gaming state, the right-handed display 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, due to the time-saving gaming state, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value has been stopped (interrupted). Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is being performed.

Next, at timing T2, a fluctuating display of the winning normal symbols is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the second starting port 47 is opened so that it is difficult for the game ball to win. An auxiliary game in which the game is opened (short opening) using a short opening pattern (which does not substantially result in winning) is executed.

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, a variable display of normal symbols that result in a loss is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the machine is temporarily placed in a standby state.

Next, at timing T8, a variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at timing T9, when the stop display of the special symbol starts, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state starts, the right-hand hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Ru. Also, since the normal gaming state has been entered, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is resumed. Further, the stop display of the normal symbols is started.

After that, at the timing of T10, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T11, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the short-term game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened (long open) in a long open pattern in which it is easy to win a game ball. In addition, the right-handed player indicator 67 lights up.

Then, at timing T12, when the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, a variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal gaming state, it is performed in the normal pattern of fluctuating symbols. Further, the right-hand hitting indicator 67 turns off.

Thereafter, at timing T13, when the special symbol stop time M (8.0 seconds at the end of time saving) has elapsed, the first special symbol loss fluctuation display, which is the first time in the normal gaming state, is started. Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbols is disclosed, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a game ball (substantially no winning). Then, at timing T15, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47.

Here, we have shown an example in which the time-saving game state ends while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, but even if the time-saving gaming state ends while the normal symbols are being displayed in a stopped state or during an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol will not be displayed. From the fluctuation display, a fluctuation display based on a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is performed.

In addition, in the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the losing special symbol will be stopped and displayed and the time-saving game state will end, so the right-hand hit The display 67 goes out and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped, and the counting of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

In this way, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0) from the start of the time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of time-saving small hits ( Even if the remaining number of time-saving regular cards (Z) or the remaining number of time-saving regular cards (G) remains, the time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state can be ended so as to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor side and the player side, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving game state ends and the right The strike indicator 67 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages due to the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving game state ends and the normal The aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the base value is restarted. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, if the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving game state ends and the advantageous The output of the status signal is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is being fluctuated, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the next fluctuating display of the regular symbol will be changed to the normal fluctuating pattern. is now being carried out. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the time-saving game state ends while the auxiliary game is being executed, a variable display based on the normal pattern variation is performed from the next normal symbol variation display, and from the next auxiliary game, the second starting port 47 An auxiliary game is executed in which the ball is released (short release) in a short release pattern in which it is difficult to win the game ball (substantially no prize is won). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variable display control of the normal symbols or the control of the auxiliary game midway due to the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the right hit indicator 67 is turned off at the timing of transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (timing of T9), but the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit started during the time-saving game state The lighting of the right-hand game indicator 67 may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of the above ends, and the right-hand game indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing when this auxiliary game ends.

Further, if the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state results in a loss, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T9). In addition, when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is short-circuited and opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state, at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T9) When the right-hand display 67 is turned off and an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened long as a result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends The right-hand hitting indicator 67 may also be turned off.

In addition, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped at the timing of transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (timing of T9), but the fluctuating display of normal symbols that become hits started during the time-saving gaming state The output of the advantageous state signal may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of is completed, and the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing when the auxiliary game is completed.

Further, if the fluctuating display of normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state results in a loss, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T9). In addition, when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is short-circuited and opened as a result of the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state, at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T9) If an auxiliary game is executed in which the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped and the second starting port 47 is opened long as a result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends The output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at .

(Timing chart when a big win game starts from a small win game and the time saving game state ends)
FIG. 40 is a timing chart when a big win game starts from a small win game and the time saving game state ends.

First, at timing T1, the 78th normal symbol winning variation display in the time-saving gaming state is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. At this time, since the game is in a time-saving gaming state, the right-handed display 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, due to the time-saving gaming state, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value has been stopped (interrupted). Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is being performed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T3, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the second starting opening 47 makes it easy to win the game ball. An auxiliary game is executed in which the game is opened in a long opening pattern (long opening). Then, at the timing of T4, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the small winning fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed multiple times during the fluctuation display) A super-shortening fluctuation in which the second pending memory cannot be stocked is started.

Thereafter, at timing T5, the stop display of the special symbols is started, and when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the normal symbols that result in a loss (the 79th time in the time-saving game state) is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a small winning game is started. Further, the stop display of the normal symbols is started.

Next, at the timing between the timing T6 and the timing T7, the game ball that entered the first big winning hole 50 enters the specific area 53, and at the timing T7, when the small winning game ends, the jackpot game ( Opening) is started, a low-accuracy non-time-saving game state is entered, and output of a jackpot signal is started. Moreover, once the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, it becomes a standby state.

Then, at the timing of T8, a variable display of normal symbols that result in a loss is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern fluctuating pattern. Then, at the timing T9, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T10, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the machine is temporarily placed in a standby state.

Thereafter, at timing T11, a variable display of normal symbols that become a hit is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is performed in a normal pattern fluctuating pattern. Then, at the timing T12, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and when the jackpot game (ending) ends at the timing T13, the time saving gaming state is started and the output of the jackpot signal is stopped. In addition, the auxiliary game is started when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, but since the fluctuating display of the normal symbols was started during the jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 47 is not connected to the winning of the game ball. An auxiliary game is performed in which the short opening pattern is difficult (substantially no prize winning) is opened (short opening).

Next, at timing T14, the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second start opening 47, and a variable display of normal symbols (first time in the time-saving game state) is started, which results in a loss. Since this fluctuating display was started during the time-saving gaming state, it is performed in the normal pattern fluctuating pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing T15, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the machine is temporarily placed in a standby state.

Thereafter, at timing T17, a variable display of normal symbols that result in a loss (the second time in the time-saving gaming state) is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the time-saving gaming state, it is performed in the normal pattern fluctuating pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing T18, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T19, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the machine is temporarily placed in a standby state.

In this manner, when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, the lighting of the right-handed display 67 and the output of the advantageous state signal are continued. Therefore, there is no need to temporarily turn off the right-hand hitting indicator 67 or to temporarily stop outputting the advantageous state signal, and it is possible to simplify control.

(Timing chart when the time saving game state ends when the remaining number of time saving games reaches 0)
FIG. 41 is a timing chart when the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of time-saving regular charts (G) becomes 0.

First, at timing T1, the 78th normal symbol winning variation display in the time-saving gaming state is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. At this time, since the game is in a time-saving gaming state, the right-handed display 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, due to the time-saving gaming state, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value has been stopped (interrupted). Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is being performed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T3, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the second starting opening 47 makes it easy to win the game ball. An auxiliary game is executed in which the game is opened in a long opening pattern (long opening). Then, at the timing of T4, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a small winning fluctuation display of the second special symbol (during the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game is executed multiple times and the second hold A stock chance change that allows you to stock (increase) memory is started.

Thereafter, at timing T5, the auxiliary game ends without a game ball entering the second start opening 47, and the normal symbol loss fluctuation display (79th time in the time-saving game state) is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the machine is temporarily placed in a standby state.

Next, at timing T8, the winning variation display of the normal symbols (80th time in the time-saving gaming state) is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T9, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T10, the second starting port 47 is opened with a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win the game ball (substantially no winning) (short opening) An auxiliary game is executed. Then, at timing T11, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting port 47.

At timing T12 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal symbol winning variation display (99th time in the time-saving gaming state) is started. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. Then, at timing T13, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at timing T14, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that makes it easy to win the game ball (long opening). . Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 between timings T14 and T15, the second holding memory (holding memory that is almost a small win or a jackpot) is stocked (increased).

Further, at timing T15, the auxiliary game ends and the winning variation display of the normal symbols starts. This fluctuating display is performed in a regular pattern fluctuating pattern for time saving. In addition, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state starts, the output of the advantageous state signal stops, the right-handed display 67 turns off, and all information aggregation for calculating the normal base value restarts. Ru.

Then, at the timing of T16, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T17, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started during the time-saving game state. Therefore, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened (long open) in a long open pattern in which it is easy to win a game ball. In addition, the right-handed player indicator 67 lights up. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 between the timing of T17 and the timing of T18, the second holding memory (holding memory that is almost a small win or a jackpot) is stocked (increased).

Next, at timing T18, the auxiliary game ends and a loss fluctuation display of normal symbols is started. This fluctuation display is performed in a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Further, the right-hand hitting indicator 67 turns off. Then, at timing T19, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, at timing T20, when the stop time for the normal symbols and the stop time for the special symbols have elapsed, the small winning game is started. Then, at the timing between the timing of T20 and the timing of T21, the game ball that entered the first big winning hole 50 enters the specific area 53, and at the timing of T21, when the small winning game ends, the jackpot game ( Opening) is started, a low-probability non-time-saving game state is entered, output of a jackpot signal and an advantageous state signal is started, and the right hit indicator 67 lights up. In addition, a loss fluctuation display of normal symbols is started.

In this way, when the small hit fluctuation display (stock chance fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started during the time-saving game state, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game is executed multiple times while the special symbol is fluctuating. It is possible to stock (increase) the second reserved memory. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more enthusiastic about executing the fluctuating display of normal symbols that can stock (increase) the second reserved memory that is almost a small hit or a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the right hit indicator 67 is turned off at the timing of transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (timing of T15), but the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit started during the time-saving game state The lighting of the right-hand game indicator 67 may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of the above ends, and the right-hand game indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing when this auxiliary game ends.

In addition, if the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state results in a loss, the right-handed display 67 may be turned off at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T15). In addition, when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is short-circuited and opened as a result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state, at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T15) When the right-hand display 67 is turned off and an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened long as a result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends The right-hand hitting indicator 67 may also be turned off.

In addition, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped at the timing of transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (timing of T15), but the fluctuating display of normal symbols that become hits started during the time-saving gaming state The output of the advantageous state signal may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game executed as a result of is completed, and the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing when the auxiliary game is completed.

Furthermore, if the fluctuating display of normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state results in a loss, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing T15). In addition, when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is short-circuited and opened as a result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving gaming state, at the timing of transition to the normal gaming state (timing of T15) If an auxiliary game is executed in which the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped and the second starting port 47 is opened long as a result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, the timing at which the auxiliary game ends The output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at .

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of main processing in the production control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are enabled in step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the production control section 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E200. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process is performed to analyze the command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Note that details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in a customer waiting state where special symbols are not displayed or special games (big hit games, small win games) are being executed. Based on the fact that the waiting time has elapsed, processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to stimulate the player's desire to play.

The sub CPU 130a performs operation-based performance execution processing in step E500. Specifically, a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable performance is executed, and the expectation level that a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during this valid period is increased. Processing is performed to execute an operation-based jackpot preview performance that suggests (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed).

The "operation-based jackpot preview effect" includes a line preview effect that suggests the level of expectation for the jackpot game to be executed depending on the type and display mode of the line displayed on the image display device, and a cut-in image displayed on the image display device. Depending on the type and display mode, a cut-in preview effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, a success effect with a 100% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, or a failure with a 0% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. There are four types of performances that indicate whether or not a special game will be executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process in step E600. Specifically, by changing the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 75 in accordance with changes in the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the display mode of the icon, the lamp emits light that indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing to execute the performance.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E700. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes normal production modes A to D set in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), countdown mode, time saving production mode A set in the first time saving gaming state, and time saving production mode A set in the second time saving gaming state. A time-saving performance mode B that is set, a time-saving performance mode C that is set in the third time-saving game state, etc. are provided.

"Normal production modes A to D" are production modes that can be set when the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 21(a) is selected.
"Countdown mode" is an effect mode that can be set when the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 21(b) is selected.

In addition, in the normal performance modes A to D and the countdown mode, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a display mode including characters and numbers. In addition, the difference between the normal production modes A to D and the countdown mode is whether or not the remaining number of variable displays of special symbols until at least the third time-saving game state occurs is displayed, and in this embodiment, , background images and BGM are also different.

For the "time-saving production modes A to B", the time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 22(a) or the time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 22(b) is selected. There is a production mode that can be set at times.
"Time-saving performance mode C" is a performance mode that can be set when the time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 22(b) is selected.

In the time-saving production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a display mode of only numbers without characters. Furthermore, the time-saving effect modes A to C differ in the background images, BGM, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs a third time saving effect process in step E750. Specifically, a third time-saving effect to suggest information related to the occurrence of the third time-saving gaming state (an RWM clear negative effect suggesting that RWM clear has not been performed (is deferred), which will be described later), 3) Processes such as determining whether or not to execute an activation counter display indicating the number of fluctuations until transition to the time-saving gaming state, etc. are performed. Note that details of the third time-saving effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the overall control section 141 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Mode flow showing the transition of game modes)
FIG. 44(a) is a mode flow showing the transition of the gaming mode from the normal gaming state, and FIG. 44(b) is a mode flow showing the transition of the gaming mode from the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the special symbol jackpot fluctuation display ends in the normal gaming state, one of the first jackpot game, second jackpot game, and third jackpot game is executed, and the first jackpot game is When it ends, it shifts to the normal performance mode A (initial performance mode) which is the normal game state, and when the second jackpot game ends, it shifts to the time-saving performance mode A which is the first time-saving game state, and the third jackpot game ends. Then, the game shifts to the time-saving effect mode B, which is the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations at the time when the loss fluctuation display of the special symbol ends in the normal game state reaches the specified number (750 times), the game goes to the third time-saving game state, time-saving production mode C, without going through the jackpot game. Transition.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts in the time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G) becomes "0", and at this time, the non-loss of the second special symbol When the fluctuation display is in progress or the loss of the second special symbol is fluctuating, a result display showing the results of games in a series of advantageous sections (while in the time-saving gaming state or jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player is executed. When the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol ends, the game shifts to the normal performance mode D (a mode exclusively for after the time saving ends), which is the normal gaming state, and then the mode transition condition is established (for example, the special symbol fluctuation display 10 times, If the player wins a mode shift lottery (such as winning a lottery), the mode shifts to normal performance mode A.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-saving special symbols or the remaining number of time-saving small hits (Z) becomes "0", and at this time, the auxiliary game in which the normal symbol is non-variable displaying or the second starting port 47 is opened short-circuited. When the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner when executed, the result display in a series of advantageous sections is not executed and the game shifts to the normal performance mode A which is the normal game state.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, a small winning game is executed after the small winning variation display of the second special symbol starts with a super shortening variation, and during this small winning game, the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 and the time saving feature If the small winning game ends with the remaining number of drawings (J), the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), or the remaining number of time-saving general drawings (G) remaining "0", a result display in a series of advantageous sections will be executed. The game shifts to normal performance mode A, which is a normal gaming state.

On the other hand, even if a small winning game is executed after the small winning variation display of the second special symbol starts with a super shortening variation in the time saving game state, and the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 during this small winning game. , If the remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J), the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving regular drawings (G) are values larger than "0", the time-saving game state is entered after the small winning game ends. The mode returns to the original time-saving performance mode (any of time-saving performance mode A, time-saving performance mode B, and time-saving performance mode C).

In addition, if a small winning game is executed after the small winning fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts with a super shortening fluctuation in the time saving game state, and a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during this small winning game, this small winning After the winning game ends, a fourth jackpot game is executed, and after the fourth jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving performance mode A, which is a first time-saving game state.

In addition, when the jackpot variation display or small win variation display of the second special symbol is started with stock chance variation in the time saving game state, stock chance mode performance is performed. Even if the remaining number of short-time regular symbols (G) becomes "0" due to the variable display of normal symbols being executed during this stock chance mode, the stock chance mode continues. Further, when the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol in the stock chance variation is finished, a third jackpot game is executed, and after the third jackpot game is finished, a shift is made to a time-saving performance mode B which is a second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the small winning fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the stock chance fluctuation ends, a small winning game is executed, and even if the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during this small winning game, the time saving special If the remaining number of times (J), the remaining number of time-saving small winnings (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving general drawings (G) are values larger than "0", the original number in the time-saving game state after the small winning game ends. Return to the time-saving performance mode (any of time-saving performance mode A, time-saving performance mode B, and time-saving performance mode C). On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during this small winning game, a fourth jackpot game is executed after this small winning game ends, and a time saving effect that is in the first time saving game state after the fourth jackpot game ends. Shift to mode A.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
The command analysis process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the production control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power ON notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, a notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. If so, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification, and movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable Processing is performed to perform an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined manner, initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined manner, and the like.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related designation command. If it is an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error system specification commands" include unrecoverable error specification command, fraudulent winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification This includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error specification command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, processing is performed to update the gaming state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a reserved number of special drawings designation command or a command of designated number of regular symbols reserved. If the command is a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings or a command for specifying the number of general drawings, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a command for specifying the number of special drawings or the number of general drawings held, the process moves to step E314. .

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, when receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (a first command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings, a second command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings), the number of reserved special drawings stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated. Then, a production instruction command for updating (increasing or decreasing) the first pending icon in the first pending icon display area 70B, the first pending number display area 70E, and the second pending number display area 70F is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Performs processing to set it in the send buffer. As a result, the production instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending number is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and the second pending number display area 70F. Processing for updating (increasing or decreasing) will be performed.

Note that the display (update) of the first pending icon in the first pending icon display area 70B is performed in the normal gaming state, and is not performed in the time saving gaming state, and is not displayed in the first pending number display area 70E. The update of the pending number display in the second pending number display area 70F is performed regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, when a command for specifying the number of reserved symbols is received, the number of reserved symbols stored in the sub-RAM 130 is updated, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed in the reserved symbol display area 70G. A production instruction command for updating (increasing or decreasing) the pending number display in is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the general figure reservation icon in the general figure reserve icon display area 70D and the pending number display in the general figure reserve number display area 70G are updated (increase or decrease). ) will be processed.

In addition, the display (update) of the regular game reservation icon in the regular game reservation icon display area 70D is performed when the time saving game state is in effect, and is not performed when the regular game state is in the regular game state. The update of the pending number display in is performed regardless of the gaming state.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol pre-reading designation command or a regular symbol pre-reading designation command. If it is a special figure pre-reading designation command or a regular figure pre-reading designation command, the received pre-reading designation command (special figure scheduled variation pattern, regular figure scheduled variation pattern) is set in the later-described pre-reading storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and then step The process moves to step E315, and if it is not a pre-reading designation command (first special figure pre-reading designation command, second special figure pre-reading designation command, general figure pre-reading designation command), the process moves to step E318.

The "pre-reading storage area" consists of a first pre-reading storage section for sequentially storing pre-reading information (special figure schedule fluctuation patterns, etc.) based on the first special figure pre-reading designation command, and reservation information based on the second special figure pre-reading designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing information, and a memory unit (0th storage unit) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the fluctuating display (fluctuation effect) being executed. The storage unit and the second prefetch storage unit are each divided into first to fourth storage units.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, and receive the first special figure prefetch designation command. Then, the prefetch information is stored in the storage section corresponding to the first pending storage. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and receive the second special figure prefetch designation command. Then, the prefetch information is stored in the storage section corresponding to the second pending storage. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special symbol determination information execution storage area, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first pre-read storage unit The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the second look-ahead unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. Ru.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing in step E315. Specifically, by displaying the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the icon in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), results advantageous to the player can be achieved. Whether or not to execute an icon change effect that indicates the expectation level (possibility) of a big winning game being executed, a small winning game being executed, an auxiliary game being executed, and the icon change effect to be executed. Performs processing to determine presentation mode, etc. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emission effect determination process. Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the top lamp 10b located in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame illumination device 10 is caused to emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode. Whether or not to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the expectation that the result will be advantageous (a jackpot game, a small winning game, an auxiliary game), and when to execute a winning light effect. Performs processing to determine the presentation mode of the light emission effect, etc.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, an advantageous result is obtained for the player (a jackpot game is executed, a small win game is executed) Decide whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous performance (suggesting the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed) and the type of look-ahead continuous performance to be executed, and create a look-ahead continuous performance. In order to execute the process, a production instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed. Note that details of the prefetch continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special pattern variation pattern designation command or a regular pattern variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command or a regular figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special figure variation pattern designation command or regular figure variation pattern designation command, a variable production pattern that is a production mode of a variation production executed by a production device including an image display device is determined. , performs a process of setting a performance instruction command indicating a variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed. Note that details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs preview performance determination processing in step E322. Specifically, based on the variable effect pattern determined in step E321, the result is advantageous to the player (a jackpot game is executed, a small win game is executed, an auxiliary game is executed). It determines whether or not to execute a preview performance that makes people look forward to it, the performance mode (pattern) of the preview performance to be executed, and sets the execution information of the preview performance in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing is performed to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or to change the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon.

The sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for starting the prefetch continuous performance determined in the prefetch continuous performance determination process of step E317 or for changing the performance mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command for a special symbol or a symbol confirmation command for a normal symbol. If it is a special symbol design confirmation command or a normal symbol design confirmation command, the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a special symbol pattern confirmation command or a normal pattern pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step E327. .

The sub CPU 130a performs production symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance symbols and ending the variable performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process moves to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The "special game system designation commands" include jackpot opening designation commands, jackpot round designation commands, jackpot ending designation commands, small win opening designation commands, small win ending designation commands, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game performance determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining the opening performance of a jackpot game or a small winning game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the round In the case of a specified command, processing is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending specification command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing a round performance, and in the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance. Processing is performed to set the performance instruction command for determining the ending performance of the small winning game and executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening production, round production, and ending production is performed.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetching designation commands (first special figure prefetching designation command, second special figure prefetching designation command, and general pattern prefetching designation command) received from the main control board 110, and executes step E315- In step 2, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, and when the first special symbol pre-reading designation command based on winning the first starting port 45 is received, the normal game state is present. , When receiving the general pattern pre-reading designation command based on the winning of the general pattern gate 44, it is possible that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (specific gaming state). In addition, when the second special figure pre-reading designation command based on winning the second start opening 47 is received, the icon change effect is not executed.

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a performs advance suspension (if it is a first special symbol pre-reading designation command, a general symbol pre-reading designation command for the pending memory corresponding to the first special symbol pre-reading designation command received earlier). If so, it is determined whether there is a change scenario in the reserved memory corresponding to the previously received standard map pre-read designation command), that is, whether a change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. If there is a change scenario, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command will not be executed, and the process moves to step E315-7; if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. Based on the type of specified command (scheduled variation pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, one icon final display mode is determined from among the plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) for performing an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for which an icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the pending icon change scenario determination table (special figure pending icon change scenario determination table or general figure pending icon change scenario determination table) shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from among the plurality of change scenarios based on the number of reserved memories (first special symbol, normal symbol) and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and changes the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and the second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not to be performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is to be performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the advance hold includes something that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the reach effect is better when the advance hold does not include a reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than in the case where the icon change effect is included.

In addition, when the normal figure pre-reading designation command is received during the time-saving gaming state, the icon change effect is executed, but the icon change effect is not executed even if the normal figure pre-reading specification command is received in the time-saving gaming state. It's okay. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

In addition, even if the second special figure pre-read designation command is received during the time-saving gaming state, the icon change effect is not executed, but in the time-saving gaming state, the number of pending icons corresponding to the second pending memory (U2) is may be displayed, and upon receiving the second special figure pre-read designation command, the icon change effect may be executed. On the other hand, the number of pending icons corresponding to the second pending memory (U2) may be displayed, but the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table includes the gaming state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the type of symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), and the type of prefetch designation command (special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern). , ordinary map scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode are associated, and for reference, the production contents of the scheduled fluctuation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead designation command are shown. is listed.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (white icon) that does not suggest the expectation of a big or small win, and a special icon (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggests the expectation of a big or small win. It is set. Moreover, the expectation level of a big hit or a small hit related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that when the first special figure prefetch designation command indicates a jackpot, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode. On the other hand, if the ordinary symbol pre-read designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. By doing this, the player is not overjoyed at the time when an auxiliary game in which it is not certain that a jackpot game will be executed is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. (the icon tends to turn into a red icon). By doing this, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations when an auxiliary game (opening of the second starting port 47) that is likely to lead to a jackpot is executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the regular pattern scheduled variation pattern specified by the regular pattern pre-reading designation command is more likely to be a chance variation (loss) than a shortened variation (loss). In certain cases, the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to become a blue icon or a red icon). By doing this, it becomes easier to increase the player's sense of expectation when a chance variation is executed, which has a higher expectation of winning than a shortened variation, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. When an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time (an easy-to-win opening) is executed than in the case of a loss disguise variation (win), which is a variation pattern when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a long time (opening with easy winning). In the case of a chance variation (win), which is a variation pattern, the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to become a blue icon or a red icon). By doing this, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations when an auxiliary game (opening of the second starting port 47) that is likely to lead to a jackpot is executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. 47, the variation pattern when the auxiliary game is not executed is higher than that when the auxiliary game is executed. In the case of a pattern of loss disguise variation (win), the icon change performance is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to become blue).

The sixth feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is when a jackpot game is executed or when an auxiliary game that is likely to lead to a jackpot (an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened long) is executed. There is an icon change effect (display of a rainbow icon) that suggests in advance that a jackpot game will be executed even before a predetermined period (for example, one change before) of a variable effect in which a jackpot game or auxiliary game is executed. ) can be executed, but since it is not determined whether or not the third time-saving gaming state will occur, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving gaming state will occur is not executed. The following points can be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot, while avoiding the inconvenience of the third time-saving game state not occurring in the first place, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, if the general pattern pre-reading designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode, but an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened long is executed. In the case of a chance change (win), as long as you hit the game ball to the right, there is an almost 100% probability that it will enter the second starting hole 47 and it will be a small win or a jackpot, so the final icon display Alternatively, a rainbow icon may be determined. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's awareness of the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened long, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the general map look-ahead designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is determined due to a jackpot than the rainbow icon is determined due to a hit. It is recommended that the percentage of In this way, it is possible to differentiate between a jackpot and a jackpot that is not certain to become a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing a special figure holding icon change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining the change scenario of the first holding icon, and FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing the change scenario of the general figure holding icon. It is a figure which shows the general map pending icon change scenario determination table referred to when determining.

Each change scenario determination table includes the final icon display mode, the memory number of special symbols or normal symbols corresponding to the pre-read designation command (first special symbol pre-read designation command, general symbol pre-read designation command), and the selection rate of each change scenario. (%) and the selected change scenario are associated, and for reference, the prior change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Preliminary variation" means a variation display that is executed based on the special figure judgment information or general figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information or general figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received pre-read designation command. (Fluctuating effect), and "the relevant variation" refers to a variable display (Fluctuating effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information or regular figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. be.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

The first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. There is a difference in the rate at which the icon changes to the highly anticipated common map pending icon. By doing this, it is possible to make the tendency of icon change different between the special figure pending icon and the regular figure pending icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is the rate at which the special drawing pending icon is displayed in the icon final display mode when winning a prize, and the proportion at which the regular drawing holding icon is displayed in the icon final display mode at the time of winning. There are some differences between the two. By doing this, it is possible to make the tendency of icon change different between the special figure pending icon and the regular figure pending icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that even if the final icon display mode is the same (for example, blue icon, red icon), the change scenario (change pattern) of the special figure reservation icon The difference is that the number of change scenarios (change patterns) of the general figure reservation icon is different. By doing this, it is possible to make the tendency of icon change different between the special figure pending icon and the regular figure pending icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but the third time-saving game state does occur. An icon change effect (for example, display of a blinking yellow icon, output of a change sound, etc.) indicating this may be executed. In this case, before the predetermined period (for example, 1 variation before) of the variation production in which the jackpot game is executed, the execution of the icon change production that suggests the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is restricted (for example, the execution The change sound may not be output even if it is executed, etc.).

(Production control unit's winning lighting effect decision process)
With reference to FIG. 49, the winning light emission performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the winning light emission effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the pre-reading designation commands (first special symbol pre-reading designation command, second special symbol pre-reading designation command, general symbol pre-reading designation command) received from the main control board 110, and executes step E316- In step 2, it is determined whether or not the present time is the executable period for the winning light emission effect. If it is the executable period for the winning light emitting effect, the process moves to step E316-3, and if it is not the winning time light emitting effect executable period, the winning light emitting effect is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it is not the case, the process for determining the light emitting effect at the time of winning this time is ended.

"Period during which the light emitting effect can be executed at the time of winning" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, and when the first special symbol pre-reading designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal game state is in effect. In particular, when receiving the second special symbol pre-reading designation command based on winning in the second starting gate 47 or the general symbol pre-reading designation command based on winning in the regular pattern gate 44, it is possible that the game is in a time-saving gaming state. It will be done.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E316- 4, a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light emission effect pattern. Specifically, with reference to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. , one winning light emitting effect pattern is determined from among a plurality of winning light emitting effect patterns based on the selection rate (%) of each winning light emitting effect pattern.

In step E316-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. If the pattern is to execute the light emitting effect when winning, the process moves to step E316-7, and if the pattern is not to execute the light emitting effect when winning, the current light emitting effect determining process is terminated.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a winning light emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emitting effect determining process. As a result, the winning light emitting effect execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the winning light emitting effect is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the winning light emitting effect execution command.

(Light emission pattern determination table when winning a prize)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a winning light emitting effect pattern.

The winning lighting effect pattern determination table includes the type of symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol, normal symbol), the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled variable pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern. ) and the selected winning light emitting effect pattern are associated with each other, and for reference, the effect mode for each winning light emitting effect pattern is described.

The winning light emitting effect pattern includes a winning light emitting effect pattern 00 in which the winning light emitting effect is not executed, and winning light emitting effects patterns 01 and 02 in which the winning light emitting effect is executed. In the winning light emission patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), the special symbol pre-reading designation command (scheduled variation pattern), which has a high degree of expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, makes it easier to execute the light-emitting effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations for the execution of a variable performance that is highly expected to have an advantageous result for the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that it is more suitable for a jackpot or a hit (a jackpot via a small win after entering the second starting opening 47) than for a loss. However, one point is that the light-emitting effect when winning a prize is easier to execute. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot or a win (a jackpot can be expected via a small win by entering the second starting slot 47), and improves the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The third feature of the winning light emitting pattern determination table shown in FIG. A jackpot game or an auxiliary game (a jackpot game or an auxiliary game (in which you can expect a jackpot via a small win by entering the second starting opening 47) is performed even before the predetermined period (for example, 1 variation before) of the variation performance in which the jackpot game or auxiliary game is executed While it is possible to execute a winning light emitting effect (rainbow light emission & output of sound effects) that suggests in advance that a game (you can expect to win a jackpot via a small win by entering the second starting opening 47), When the third time-saving gaming state occurs, a winning light-emitting effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving gaming state will occur is not executed. By doing this, the occurrence of the third time-saving gaming state is prevented while increasing the player's expectation of a jackpot or winning (a jackpot can be expected via a small win by entering the second starting opening 47). Such inconveniences can be avoided and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fourth feature of the winning light emitting pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the winning light emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points that can be mentioned is that the light-emitting effect pattern allows you to perform a light-emitting effect when winning a prize. By doing so, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is also possible to provide a light emission effect pattern (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and a confirmation sound is output from the audio output device 9) when a jackpot is confirmed, and in this case, a full rotation reach It is preferable that a winning light emitting effect pattern is determined that will ensure a jackpot at the lowest rate when the above is executed.

In addition, when the third time-saving gaming state occurs, the winning light emitting effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving gaming state will occur is not executed, but the third time-saving gaming state does occur. A light-emitting effect (for example, flashing blue, outputting a sound effect, etc.) may be executed at the time of winning to suggest that the prize will be won. In this case, before the predetermined period (for example, 1 variation before) of the variation performance in which the jackpot game or the auxiliary game (in which you can expect a jackpot via the small win by entering the second starting opening 47), the third The execution of the light-emitting effect upon winning, which indicates the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state, may be restricted (for example, it may not be executed, or even if it is executed, no sound effect is output, etc.).

(Pre-read continuous performance determination processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 51, the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first special figure pre-read designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the first special figure pre-read designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the first special figure pre-read designation command is not received, the current pre-read continuous performance determination process is ended.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received first special symbol pre-reading designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the production contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the executable period of the pre-reading zone effect, the process moves to step E317-4, and if it is not the executable period of the pre-reading zone effect, the pre-reading zone effect based on the first special figure pre-reading designation command received this time is executed. The process moves to step E317-6 as not to be executed.

"Pre-reading zone production" means performing zone production (display of pre-reading zone background image, display of blue zone image or red thermal zone image, output of zone BGM or thermal zone BGM) over one or more variable productions. This is a performance that continuously suggests the level of expectation for a special game to be executed using a background image, text information, and color information (expected value information), and is a type of pre-read continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed" includes the fact that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone performance in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not in progress, that the game is in a normal game state, and so on. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed, but in the time-saving game state, the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a prefetch zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining a prefetch zone effect scenario. Note that details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, one look-ahead zone performance scenario is determined from among a plurality of look-ahead zone performance scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch zone effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch zone effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch zone effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is an executable period for the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the process moves to step E317-9, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the prefetch countdown effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown performance" is a countdown performance (displaying a count image, outputting a count sound) over one or more variable performances to intermittently increase the expectation level for a special game to be executed using text information and sound information. It is a suggestive performance, and is a type of forward-looking continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed" includes the following conditions: there is no advance pending to execute the look-ahead countdown performance, the jackpot game is not in progress, the time-saving game state, etc. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the prefetch countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining the scenario of the prefetch countdown effect. The details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch countdown performance scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, one look-ahead countdown performance scenario is determined from among a plurality of look-ahead countdown performance scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch countdown effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown performance scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch countdown effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch countdown effect is performed. When this process is finished, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is finished.

In this way, when the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the prefetch continuous performance is executed, while when the variable performance corresponding to the normal symbol is executed, the prefetch continuous performance is executed. It is designed so that it will not happen. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the case where the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable effect corresponding to the normal symbol is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, a prefetch continuous performance is executed, while a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol (such as a variable performance with only special symbols) is executed. In this case, the prefetch continuous effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the case where the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the variable performance corresponding to the normal symbol is executed, the prefetch continuous performance may be executed. In this case, the execution rate may be lower when the winning variation effect corresponding to the normal symbol is executed than when the jackpot variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol is executed. You can do it the other way around. Furthermore, the execution rate may be set to be lower when the loss variation effect corresponding to the normal symbol is executed than when the loss variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, or vice versa. Good too.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone performance scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table includes the number of reserved first special symbols, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the first special symbol look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for zone performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of look-ahead zone performance in the relevant fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" refers to a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received first special figure pre-reading designation command. And, "the said variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received 1st special figure pre-read designation command.

"Zone" means that normal zone effects (display of prefetched zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed, and "heat zone" means that normal zone effects are executed. A heat zone performance (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance is executed.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed, and scenarios in which the zone performance is not executed during the preliminary fluctuation and the zone performance is performed during the fluctuation ( For example, scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a production scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a production mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of a special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not the performance mode of the performance in the zone will progress (change), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance progresses (changes) more easily with this variation than with advance variation. By doing so, it becomes easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can reach its peak during the fluctuations, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that a look-ahead zone effect that suggests that the game will be confirmed is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the look-ahead zone performance, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

Note that a look-ahead zone effect that suggests that it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed may be executed, but a look-ahead zone effect that suggests that it is certain that the third time-saving game state will occur may be executed. Zone effects may not be executed.

(Look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a prefetch countdown performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a prefetch countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table includes the number of reserved first special symbols, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the first special symbol look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for the countdown performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of the look-ahead countdown performance for the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" refers to a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received first special figure pre-reading designation command. And, "the said variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received 1st special figure pre-read designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound, and "count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that the game is finalized is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the look-ahead countdown performance, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

Note that a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed may be executed, but a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that it is certain that the third time-saving game state will occur may be executed. The countdown effect may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 47 to 53)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables related to the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. Execution of predetermined look-ahead effects suggested in advance (icon change effect, light-up effect when winning, etc.) is restricted, and during time-saving gaming, the results of the fluctuating display of normal symbols (normal symbol retention memory (F)) are not displayed in advance. One of the points is that it is possible to execute predetermined look-ahead effects (icon change effect, winning light emission effect, etc.). By doing this, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state where the variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables related to look-ahead effects shown in FIGS. 47 to 53 is the number of types of look-ahead effects that suggest in advance the result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed during the normal gaming state. (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead countdown effect, light-up effect when winning) , lighting effect when winning a prize) is smaller. By doing this, while improving the performance effect in the normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothered by the pre-reading performance in the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a third feature related to the various tables related to the look-ahead effects shown in FIGS. 47 to 53, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is One point is that the execution of an icon change effect that suggests the result of (second pending storage (U2)) in advance is restricted. By doing this, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest in the fluctuating display of the normal symbols than the fluctuating display of the second special symbols in the time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the various tables related to look-ahead effects shown in FIGS. 47 to 53 is the number of types of look-ahead effects that suggest in advance the result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving gaming state. The number of types of look-ahead effects (icon change effect, light emission effect when winning) that suggest in advance the result of the fluctuating display of normal symbols executed during the time-saving gaming state is greater than (light emission effect when winning). There are several points that can be mentioned. By doing this, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest in the fluctuating display of the normal symbols than the fluctuating display of the second special symbols in the time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step E321-3, and if it is not the normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state), the process moves to step E321-4.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a selects the normal variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 55(a)), and moves the process to step E321-5. Note that details of the normal variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the time-saving variable effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 55(b)), and moves the process to step E321-5.

In step E321-5, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a normal variable performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 56 is a diagram that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in the time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for time saving.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the fluctuation effect pattern determination table includes symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), fluctuation pattern designation commands (special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, regular symbol fluctuation The type of special pattern corresponding to the pattern specification command), the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern are associated, and the effect configuration of each variable effect pattern is listed for reference. There is. In addition, in the variation performance other than "special symbol variation" which will be described later, both the variation display of the production symbol 70 and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are performed.

"Variation" in the production structure column indicates that a normal variation display in which a ready-to-win state is not formed due to the production symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"Variation (Episode 1)" refers to the first stage of a stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production that includes pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and that can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the first episode of the story will be performed.
"Fluctuation (Episode 2)" refers to the second stage of a stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the second episode of the story following the first episode will be performed.
"Fluctuation (Episode 3)" refers to the third stage of the stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the third episode of the story that follows the second episode will be performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed depending on the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" means a temporary stop after forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) by the performance pattern 70a that does not include a character but only numbers. It shows.
"c pattern loss" means to form a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'' which is different from the initial appearance described later) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character and temporarily stop. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a winning number (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") is formed by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and then the game is temporarily stopped.
“C pattern alignment” indicates that a winning number (a jackpot display mode such as “222” or “777”) is formed by the effect pattern 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped at a winning number (jackpot display mode) becomes a winning number that is more advantageous to the player than this winning number (for example, in the first jackpot game). The second most advantageous second jackpot game is executed from the even numbered winning result (``222'', ``444'', ``666'', ``888'') to the odd numbered winning result (``111'', 555, 999, etc.), the most advantageous 3rd jackpot game will be executed based on the even number winning result for the first jackpot and the odd number winning result for the second jackpot. After provoking the odds of winning an odd number (such as 333, 777, etc.), a promotion success effect will be performed in which the more favorable person will receive a winning result, or the more favorable person will receive a winning result. This indicates that a re-lottery performance is performed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in a promotion failure.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

"Special symbol variation (no production symbol variation)" indicates that only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the production symbol 70a.
"Special symbol loss" indicates that the special symbol TZ forms a loss number (a loss display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) and then stops.
"Special symbol alignment" indicates that the special symbol TZ forms a winning number (win display mode such as "222" or "777") and then stops.

"Short stock chance performance" indicates that a chance performance is executed to notify that it is a chance period to stock (increase) the second holding memory (U2) which will almost be a small win or a big win.
"Middle stock chance performance" is a chance performance that notifies you that it is a chance period to stock (increase) the second hold memory (U2) that will be a small hit or jackpot for a longer period of time than the short stock chance performance. It shows that it will be done.
"Long stock chance performance" is a chance performance that notifies you that it is a chance period to stock (increase) the second hold memory (U2) that will be a small hit or jackpot for a longer period of time than the middle stock chance performance. It shows that it will be done.

The "stock result effect" indicates that in the stock chance effect, an effect to notify whether or not the second pending memory (U2) has been stocked is executed.
"Chance performance" refers to whether or not the chance result is advantageous to the player (the second starting port 47 opens in a long opening pattern) according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the passage of the valid period. This indicates that a decisive effect indicating whether or not the auxiliary game will be executed will be executed.

The first feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when a player loses in the hit determination of a normal symbol during a time-saving game state (second game state) that is different from the normal game state (first game state), If it is determined that the first determination result is different from the result (a hit with a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that is easy to win a prize) is determined, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a first result suggestion performance (a performance suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player, specifically, a stop roll in which three performance symbols 70a are aligned with the same symbol) At the same time, during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), a second judgment result different from the first judgment result (the second starting opening 47 indicates that it is difficult to win (substantially winning a prize) (No) If it is determined that the auxiliary game that opens with a short opening pattern is a hit with a normal symbol that is executed, the first result suggestion performance is a variable performance (game performance) that involves a variable display of the performance symbol 70a A different second result suggestion performance (a performance that suggests a disadvantageous result to the player, specifically, a performance in which the three performance symbols 70a are disjointed stop rolls, and the stop roll of the special symbol TZ is The point is that the same effect as in the case of a losing result is executed except for the eyes. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the result is not a loss, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the second result suggestion performance is a performance that suggests a result that is disadvantageous to the player, even if it is not a losing result, it may not make the player have excessive expectations when it is not substantially advantageous to the player. This eliminates this problem, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that during the time-saving game state (second game state), which is different from the normal game state (first game state), there is a loss in the hit determination of normal symbols. If it is determined that the first determination result is different from the result (a hit with a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that is easy to win a prize) is determined, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuating performance accompanied by the above, a plurality of performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed at the stop number of the first mode (the winning number when the three performance symbols 70a are aligned), and the normal display is performed during the time-saving game state (second game state). A second judgment result different from the first judgment result in the winning judgment of the symbol (a hit with a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened with a short opening pattern that is difficult to win (practically does not win) ), in a variable performance (game performance) involving a variable display of the performance symbols 70a, the plurality of performance symbols 70a are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (the three performance symbols 70a are One of the points is that the display is stopped when the number of failures is different. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the result is not a loss, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the stop roll in the second aspect is a losing result that suggests a disadvantageous result for the player, even if it is not a losing result, it may cause excessive damage to the player if it is not substantially advantageous to the player. This eliminates expectations for the game, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the time-saving game state (second game state), a first determination result different from a loss result in the hit determination of the normal symbol (an auxiliary game in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that makes winning easy) is executed. If it is determined that the result is a hit (hit with a normal symbol), a plurality of performance symbols 70a are made into a state where odd numbered symbols are aligned in a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols 70a, and a time-saving game state (second game state) A second judgment result different from the first judgment result in the hit judgment of a normal symbol inside (a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened with a short opening pattern that is difficult to win (practically does not win) If it is determined that it is a hit), in a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols 70a, the number of even numbers of the multiple performance symbols 70a are aligned, or the left and right performance symbols 70a are the same, As a reach loss roll where the center performance symbols are different, or a special loss roll with a predetermined regularity such as the left and center or center and right performance symbols 70a are the same symbol and the remaining one is a different symbol. Good too.

In addition, we provide a variable probability game state in which the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and during the variable probability game state, the first judgment result (second starting port 47 that is different from the loss result) in the hit judgment of the normal symbol is the winning result. If it is determined that the auxiliary game that opens with an easy long opening pattern is a hit with a normal symbol, the first result suggestion performance (game While performing a performance that suggests an advantageous result to the player (specifically, a performance in which the three performance symbols 70a are the same pattern and result in a stop result), when a normal symbol hits during a variable game state, It is determined that the second determination result is different from the first determination result (a hit with a normal symbol in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened with a short opening pattern that is difficult to win (practically does not win)) In this case, in a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols 70a, a second result suggestion performance (a performance suggesting a disadvantageous result to the player, specific Specifically, the same performance as in the case where the three performance symbols 70a have different stop results, except for the stop result of the special symbol TZ, may be performed.

A third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that the first game performance is accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbol 70a (corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol). A corresponding first variable performance, a second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol), and a second game performance (second starting opening) accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. 47 is a long opening pattern that is easy to win a prize. , the execution of the second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance) that involves the variable display of the performance pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the normal symbol is restricted, and during the time-saving gaming state (second game state), the normal symbol The point is that it is possible to execute a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance) accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a in response to the fluctuating display. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between the normal gaming state (first gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), and the production effect in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) can be improved. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable probability game state is provided in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and during the normal game state, a second game performance with a variable display of the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is provided. (Public figure fluctuation performance) is restricted, and during the probability variable game state, a second game performance (Public pattern fluctuation performance) accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol can be executed. Good too.

A fourth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that in the time-saving gaming state, the first variable performance ( Execution of the first game performance) is restricted, and it is possible to execute a second variable performance (second game performance) that performs a specific performance (various stock chance performances) in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. There are several points. By doing this, it is possible to improve the production effect when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the variation performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that the first game performance (first variation It is possible to execute a second game performance (a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) according to the variable display of the normal symbols (second variable display), and a normal game state (the first variable display). When the fluctuating display (second fluctuating display) of the normal symbols is executed during the gaming state), the main control board 110 sends commands related to the fluctuating display of the regular symbols to the performance control board 130 (normal symbol designation command, regular fluctuating pattern). The specified command) is transmitted, but the execution of the second game performance (the second variable performance accompanied by the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a) is restricted, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbols ( When the second variation display) is executed, commands related to the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol designation command, normal symbol variation pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the second game The point is that a performance (a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbol 70a) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a variable probability game state is provided in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and a variable display of normal symbols (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), A command related to the fluctuating display of normal symbols (normal symbol designation command, normal symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the second game performance (accompanied by the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) (second variation effect) may be executed.

The sixth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that in the case of a jackpot, there are variable performance patterns in which the winning effect is executed and the symbols are aligned, and variable performance patterns in which the symbols are aligned and the winning effect is successful. One point is that there is a variable performance pattern in which the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the symbols are aligned with the performance symbols 70a that do not include characters, the performance is produced without the occurrence of a valid period or the operation of the production button 17. The point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the effect pattern 70a including the character becomes a pattern alignment (c pattern alignment), the occurrence of the validity period and the operation of the effect button 17 are performed. One point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without accompanying vibration is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that it is possible to execute a staged performance (story performance) that can progress step by step in a variable performance in which a pseudo continuous performance is executed, and the expectation level It is possible to perform the second stage of the stage performance (playing the movie of the second story episode) after executing the normal reach performance with a low level of reach, while the second stage of the stage performance (playing the movie of the second story episode) can be executed after the execution of the SP/SPSP reach performance with high expectations. Movie playback of the second episode) is not executed. Therefore, by varying whether or not the stage performance progresses depending on the type of reach performance, the performance effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

(Pre-announcement production decision processing by production control unit)
The preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern to be executed in the current variation effect, and in step E650-2, the result is advantageous to the player at the start of the variation (in this embodiment, the result is a jackpot). The variation start accessory feature announcement determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining an accessory advance notice pattern that makes the player expect that the game will be executed is selected, and the accessory advance notice pattern is determined. Note that details of the change start accessory advance notice determination table will be described later.

"Actual object preview performance at the start of fluctuation" means that at the start of the fluctuation effect, the accessory (first movable member 73a) is displayed according to the expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, it will be a jackpot). This is a type of jackpot preview performance that operates in a certain operating mode.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the accessory preview performance at the start of variation is one for executing the accessory preview performance at the start of variation. If the performance is not to execute the accessory notice at the start of the fluctuation, the process moves to step E650-5, and if the purpose is to execute the accessory notice at the start, in step E650-4, the accessory advance notice is executed. Set the accessory preview performance command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the accessory preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the accessory preview performance at the start of the variation according to the accessory preview pattern is executed at the start of the fluctuation performance.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a provides a reach that makes the player expect an advantageous result for the player (in this embodiment, a jackpot game will be executed) during the performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach. The ready-to-reach pre-notice determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining the notice pattern of the advance notice performance is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. Note that the details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device displays a message that is advantageous to the player. A dialogue image indicating the expectation level of the result (in this embodiment, a jackpot) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the dialogue image.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance, and determines a dialogue preview pattern. Set a dialogue preview production command according to the preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the fluctuating performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-10, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-12.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). By executing the step performance in a predetermined order until one of the steps (stages) is reached, the performance suggests the expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, it will be a jackpot).

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 61) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, determines the step-up notice pattern, and executes step-up notice pattern in step E650-10. At step 11, a step-up notice performance command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the step-up notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that performs a pseudo continuous performance, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous performance, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining the pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines the pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-14. At , a pseudo continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo continuous performance according to the pseudo continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern for executing a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes an advanced effect, the process moves to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes an advanced effect, the process moves to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-17, the development performance pattern is determined. Set the advanced production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the advanced performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a reach performance (post-reach performance) or a chance performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-reach performance or a chance performance, the current preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and determines the cut-in effect pattern. At , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-24, the final performance pattern is determined. Set the determined production command according to the pattern in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a fixed performance according to the fixed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-27 At , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-28, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance (results in an advantageous result for the player). If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-29, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-30, the final performance pattern is determined. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the above is set in the transmission buffer, and the current preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a confirmed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance according to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

(Accessory notice decision table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a variation start accessory advance notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for the fluctuation start accessory advance notice performance.

The table for determining the accessory notice at the start of fluctuation includes the game status, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, hit judgment result), variation production pattern, and the start of each variation. The selection rate (%) of the special object notice pattern and the selected change start time accessory notice pattern are associated with each other.

The accessory notice pattern at the start of the variation includes no notice, a rattling motion in which the first movable member 73a is moved up and down in the initial position (standby position) at the start of the variation production, and the start of the variation production. A weak lowering operation is set in which the first movable member 73a is lowered from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the presentation position and then returned to the initial position.

The first feature of the fluctuation start accessory notice determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the fluctuation performance corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (the fluctuation performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed, it is possible to perform the accessory notice at the start of the fluctuation (rattling motion, weak downward motion), while the fluctuation performance corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state (special symbol TZ only) When a fluctuation effect (in which the fluctuation effect changes) is executed, the effect announcement at the start of the change (rattling motion, weak descending movement) is not executed, in other words, the execution of the effect announcement effect at the start of change is restricted. It will be done. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the fluctuation start accessory notice determination table shown in FIG. (rattling motion, weak downward motion) can be executed, while in the normal game state, if a variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol (a variation production in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, the variation will start. One of the points is that the temporary object notice (rattling motion, weak downward movement) is not executed, that is, the execution of the change start effect notice performance is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the change starting accessory notice determination table shown in FIG. When a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the symbol fluctuates, a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) are executed, the variation start role One of the points is that the object preview (rattling motion, weak downward motion) is not executed, that is, the execution of the accessory notice effect at the start of fluctuation is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, or when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol fluctuate. When the variable performance to be displayed is executed, a preview of the accessory at the start of the variation may be executed, and in this case, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal gaming state. The movement may be performed at a lower rate than when the movement is performed, or only one of the rattling movement and the weak downward movement may be performed even when the movement is performed.

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach advance notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 59, the pre-reach notice determination table includes the gaming state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable performance pattern. , the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern are associated with each other.

There are three pre-reach preview patterns: ``No notice'' in which the pre-reach preview is not executed, ``Speech preview'' in which the dialogue preview is executed, and ``Step-up notice'' in which the step-up notice is executed. The type is set, and the expectation level (in this case, a jackpot game will be executed) that will result in an advantageous result for the player (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the alignment of the symbols mentioned above will be executed) is as follows: No advance notice < Line notice The production is a step-up preview production.

The first feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the pre-reach preview effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss, and that the result is advantageous to the player. The pre-reach preview performance is executed more when a variable performance pattern with a high expectation that will give an advantageous result to the player is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low expectation that will result in an advantageous outcome for the player is determined. There are easy points. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a result that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the ready-to-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. In this case, a pre-reach preview performance (a line preview performance that can execute a vibration performance with the validity period of the production button 17, a step-up preview performance that can perform a vibration performance without the validity period of the production button 17) Both) can be executed, while in the normal gaming state, if a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, the pre-reach preview performance is executed. The problem is that it is not executed, that is, the execution of the pre-reach preview performance is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. In this case, a pre-reach preview performance (a line preview performance that can execute a vibration performance with the validity period of the production button 17, a step-up preview performance that can perform a vibration performance without the validity period of the production button 17) Both) can be executed, while in the normal gaming state, if a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, the pre-reach notice performance will not be executed. In other words, the execution of the pre-reach preview performance is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59, a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, there is a pre-reach preview performance (both a dialogue preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed with the validity period of the performance button 17, and a step-up preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed without the validity period of the performance button 17). On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, variable production (variable production in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol fluctuates, only special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol) is possible. When a variable display in which the symbol TZ changes, a variable display in which the display pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol, and a variable display in which the special symbol TZ fluctuates) are executed, the pre-reach preview display is not executed, that is, the pre-reach preview display There are restrictions on execution. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the reach pre-notice determination table shown in FIG. The degree of expectation that the result (jackpot, win) will be more advantageous to the player if it is executed (the rate at which the vibrating effect is executed when the symbols are aligned as described above, the rate at which the vibrating effect is executed at the decisive effect described later) etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the level of expectation for a result (jackpot, win) that is more advantageous to the player when a dialogue preview performance is executed than when a step-up preview performance is executed (the vibration performance associated with the alignment of the symbols mentioned above) , the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in a fixed effect to be described later, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, or when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol fluctuate. When the variable effect to be displayed is executed, a pre-reach preview effect may be executed, and in this case, the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal gaming state. It may be performed at a lower rate than in the case, or even when it is performed, only one of the dialogue preview performance and the step-up preview performance may be performed.

Specifically, when the variable performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed than the fluctuation performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the rate of the pre-reach preview performance is lower. , and the pre-reach preview performance is executed at a lower rate when the variable performance corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed than the fluctuation performance corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol. The pre-reach notice performance is executed at a lower rate when the fluctuation performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed than the fluctuation performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, It is preferable to perform the pre-reach notice performance at a lower rate when the variable performance corresponding to the winning variation display of the normal symbol is executed than the variation production corresponding to the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a dialogue preview pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 60, the dialogue notice pattern determination table includes the gaming state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable performance pattern. The type, selection rate (%) of each line notice pattern, and selected line notice pattern are associated with each other, and the presentation structure (effective suggestive effect, validity period, and content) of each line notice pattern is listed for reference. There is.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the dialogue preview performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 1 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light, which is less expected to give an advantageous result to the player.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period, and "3 seconds dialogue display period" means that the dialogue image display period is 3 seconds. It shows that there is.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue production mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters, and that the normal dialogue is output as audio. It shows.
"Chance speech (black)" indicates that a chance speech that has a possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black letters, and that the chance speech is outputted as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in black letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in red letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.

"Heat line (red)" indicates that a line of fire that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player is displayed in red letters, and that line of fire is outputted as a voice.
"Golden line" means that a line with a very high expectation of giving an advantageous result to the player is displayed in gold letters, and the line is also output as audio. ing.
"Confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that a confirmed line that is certain to result in an advantageous result for the player is displayed in rainbow-colored letters, and that the confirmed line is outputted as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts from the time the lines start to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is strong for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This indicates that a strong vibrating effect will be executed.

The expectation level that will give an advantageous result to the player (in this case, a jackpot game will be executed) for each dialogue production mode is "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < " Reach lines (red)” < “hot lines (red)” < “hot lines (gold)” < “confirmed lines (rainbow)”. In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate when a line that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player (hot line or higher) is displayed. One point is that it is now possible to implement. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. The vibration effect (operation of the button vibration motor) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high) when the line preview effect of ``Heat Line'' is executed, and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high). The player is more likely to expect an advantageous result when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue that is highly expected to result in an advantageous outcome for the player (hot dialogue or higher) is displayed is relatively short. One point is that it is time. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree of expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of an advantageous result based on the vibration intensity of the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the period of vibration of the production button 17 (1 second) while the dialogue image is displayed is shorter than the display period of the dialogue image (3 seconds). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but not to have an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects performed during the dialogue preview production, but it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects, or the vibration effects may be stronger than the vibration duration of the weak vibration effects. The vibration time may be increased.

In addition, the effective period ends and the dialogue preview performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, but if the effective period ends due to the elapse of the effective time, the dialogue preview performance is executed. You may choose not to execute it.

Also, although the dialogue preview performance is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the dialogue preview performance without generating a valid period. It is also possible to perform only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a step-up notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 61, the step-up notice pattern determination table includes the gaming state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable performance. The pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the selected step-up notice pattern are associated, and for reference, the production contents of each step-up notice pattern (step-up (SU) production mode, button vibration) ) are listed.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first to second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the button vibration column means a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

"Button state" indicates the state of the production button 17 while the step-up preview production is being executed, and "Normal (off)" in the button state column is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that the production button 17 is turned off.

The expectation level that will result in an advantageous result for the player in each step-up performance mode (here, a jackpot game will be executed) is "1 → 2" < "1 → 2 → 3" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4"<"1→2→3→4→5"<"1→2→3→5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the effect button 17 is vibrated without causing any vibration. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the time is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that there is only one predetermined type of vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration time) (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the performance form from becoming complicated, and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but not to have an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for a pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 62, the pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table includes the gaming state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), variable performance. The pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and the selected pseudo-continuous performance pattern are associated, and for reference, the performance configuration (effective suggestive performance, effective period, content of performance) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern is shown. is listed.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo continuous performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 2 different from the operation sound 1 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button white" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits a white color with low expectations that will give an advantageous result to the player, and "protrusion (red)" is a protruding state in which the production button 17 protrudes and does not produce a production effect. This indicates that the button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player.

"Production content" refers to the content of the production related to the pseudo-continuous production, and "temporary suspension period of pseudo-continuation pattern 2 seconds" means that the period in which the pseudo-pattern, which will be described later, is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds. It shows.

"Pseudo-failure" in the pseudo-sequence production mode column means that the normal production pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-sequence as the central production pattern 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. This indicates that the outputted pseudo consecutive failure performance will be executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the central performance pattern 70a, which suggests the execution of a pseudo-sequence, temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, and the second movable member 73b moves slightly, and the pseudo-sequence effect is executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive success performance will be executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for one second will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

The expectation level of each promotional performance resulting in an advantageous result for the player (in this case, a jackpot game will be executed) is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". Further, the expectation level of an advantageous result for the player in each button state is "normal" < "prominent". Furthermore, the expectation level for each vibration performance to be advantageous to the player is such that "weak vibration performance" is less than "strong vibration performance."

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect period to vibrate and causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is the vibration effect that is executed when a pseudo continuous success effect is performed, which is a variable effect pattern that has a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. One point is that the period of time is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is a vibration effect that is executed when a pseudo continuous success effect is performed, which is a variable effect pattern that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player. There are two types of vibration intensity depending on the expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of an advantageous result based on the vibration intensity of the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo-sequence performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are cases in which a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the pseudo-series performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, but to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17, while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state When the corresponding variable performance (variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, the operation of the performance button 17 and the pseudo continuous performance accompanied by the vibration of the performance button 17 are not performed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17 The problem is that the execution of pseudo-sequential effects accompanied by vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 and vibration of the performance button 17, while responding to the fluctuating display of normal symbols in the normal game state. When a variable effect (a variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, a pseudo-continuous effect involving the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect One problem is that the execution of pseudo-sequence effects that involve vibration of the button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth feature of the pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17, while a variable performance (a variation of the first special symbol) is possible in the time-saving gaming state. A variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the display changes, a variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, a variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern are When a fluctuating fluctuating effect) is executed, a pseudo continuous effect that involves the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the execution of the performance is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive success effect is performed in a fluctuating effect pattern that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player, but the protruding state is not You may choose not to do so.

Further, although there are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as the vibration performance executed in the pseudo consecutive success performance, only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be used.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute a pseudo continuous success effect or a pseudo continuous failure effect without generating a valid period. The vibration performance that is often performed during the pseudo consecutive success performance may be only a 3-second weak vibration performance or only a 3-second strong vibration performance, or only a 1-second weak vibration performance or only a 1-second strong vibration performance. You may also do so.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, or when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol fluctuate. When the variable effect to be displayed is executed, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and in this case, when the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal gaming state. It is best to run it at a lower rate than .

Specifically, the operation of the production button 17 and the production are more effective when the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol is executed than the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. When a pseudo-continuous performance accompanied by vibration of the button 17 is executed at a lower rate, and a variable performance corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol is executed more than a variable display corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol. , the pseudo continuous performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate, and is more effective for the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol than the fluctuation performance corresponding to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When the corresponding fluctuating performance is executed, the pseudo continuous performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than the fluctuating performance corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol. However, when the variable performance corresponding to the winning variation display of normal symbols is executed, it is better to perform the pseudo continuous performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 at a lower rate.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an advanced performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for advanced performance.

As shown in FIG. 63, the advanced performance pattern determination table includes the gaming state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable performance pattern. The type, the development performance type for which the development performance pattern is determined, the selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, and the development performance pattern to be selected are associated. The performance, validity period, and content of the performance) are listed.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
``None'' in the effective suggestion effect column indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and ``Yes (gase)'' indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed but the validity period does not occur after that. This indicates that this is an effective suggestion effect, and "present" indicates that the effective suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

The "validity period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the advanced performance progresses step by step by long pressing the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the advanced performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect is created. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 and 2 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Normal button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. ``Normal (red)'' means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude and the effect is not projected. This indicates that the button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production related to the development production, and "Temporary stop period of development symbol 2 seconds" indicates that the period in which the development symbol is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds, which will be described later. ing.

"SP notification" in the column of development performance mode means that as a result of the development performance, an SP development design that suggests development to SP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SP development performance that outputs the first development sound effect is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development performance, an SPSP development design is derived and displayed that suggests development to the SPSP reach performance, and a SPSP development performance is executed that outputs a second development sound effect. .
"Full rotation notification" refers to the execution of a full rotation development effect that derives and displays a full rotation development symbol that suggests development to a full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect, and outputs a third development sound effect. It shows.

The "weak motion" in the accessory motion column is a weak motion effect in which the second movable member 73b emits blue light and performs a weak motion with a small motion width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.
"Strong motion" means that a strong motion effect is executed in which the second movable member 73b emits red light and performs a strong motion with a large swing width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). This indicates that a weak vibration effect will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation that each action presentation will result in an advantageous result for the player (here, a jackpot game will be executed) is "weak action" < "strong action". Further, the expectation level for each vibration performance to be advantageous to the player is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

The first feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. When SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate by generating a valid period of the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the full-rotation development performance has a higher expectation that the result will be more advantageous to the player than when the SPSP development performance is executed. When it is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development effect is executed. An example of this is that the player is more likely to expect an advantageous result when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed. Therefore, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the vibration performance that is performed when SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance to be executed depending on the degree of expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of an advantageous result based on the vibration intensity of the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development symbol is the same as the vibration period (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 during the temporary stop of the development symbol. Or, the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development symbol and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the performance button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform an advanced performance (a type of operation performance, role object movement performance, or vibration performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the action of a role object, or the vibration of the performance button 17. 2. When a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, a development performance involving the operation of the performance button 17, the movement of a role object, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is performed. The problem is that the performance is not executed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17, the action of a role object, or the execution of the advanced performance that involves the vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform an advanced performance (a type of operation performance, role object movement performance, or vibration performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the action of a role object, or the vibration of the performance button 17, while it is possible to perform When a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of symbols (a variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, a development effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the action of a role object, or the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed. In other words, the operation of the performance button 17 and the execution of the advanced performance that involves the movement of a role model or the vibration of the performance button 17 are restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, while it is possible to perform an advanced performance (a type of operation performance, role object movement performance, or vibration performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the action of a role object, or the vibration of the performance button 17, it is possible to perform a variable performance in the time-saving game state. (Variation performance where only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol fluctuates, fluctuating performance where only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol fluctuates, performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol When a variable production in which the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed, a development production involving the operation of the production button 17, the action of a role model, and the vibration of the production button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17 is not performed. In addition, the execution of advanced effects that involve the movement of special objects and the vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the advanced effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, or when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol fluctuate. When the variable effect to be displayed is executed, an advanced effect may be executed that involves the operation of the effect button 17, the action of a role model, or the vibration of the effect button 17. In this case, the first variable effect in the normal gaming state may be executed. It is preferable to perform the variable performance at a lower rate than when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol is executed.

Specifically, the operation of the production button 17 and the role are more effective when the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol is executed than the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. A development performance that involves object movements and vibrations of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate, and a variable performance that corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed more than a fluctuation performance that corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the development performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the action of the role object, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is performed at a lower rate, and the fluctuating performance that corresponds to the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is normal. When the fluctuating performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the symbol loss is executed, the development performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the action of the character, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate, and the first special symbol is Compared to the fluctuating performance that corresponds to the jackpot fluctuating display, the fluctuating performance that corresponds to the win fluctuating display of the normal symbol is executed, and the development performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the action of a role object, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is more effective. It is best to perform this at a low rate.

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 64, the cut-in performance pattern determination table includes the game state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable performance. The pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, and the selected cut-in performance pattern are associated, and the performance configuration of each cut-in performance pattern (effective suggestive performance, valid period, performance content) is shown for reference. is listed.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the cut-in performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 4 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 3 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the production button 17 during the validity period, and "normal (white)" is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This indicates that the light is emitted in white color, which is less expected to give an advantageous result to the player. "Protruding (red)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding, and indicates that the production button 17 emits a red color that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates a protruding state in which the effect button 17 is protruding, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color that is certain to give an advantageous result to the player.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed. "Cut-in display period 3 seconds" means This indicates that the image display period is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column means that a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green cut-in effect is executed in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a second cut-in sound effect is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red cut-in effect is executed in which a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a third cut-in sound effect is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the validity period ends) This indicates that a weak vibration performance in which weak vibrations are produced for 3 seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect in which the camera vibrates strongly will be executed.

The degree of expectation that each cut-in results in an advantageous result for the player is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in". Furthermore, the expectation level for each vibration performance to be advantageous to the player is such that "weak vibration performance" is less than "strong vibration performance."

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect period to vibrate and causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the vibration that is executed when a cut-in image that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player is displayed (cut-in effect is executed). One point is that the performance is relatively long. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the vibration that is executed when a cut-in image that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player is displayed (cut-in effect is executed). There are two types of vibration intensity of the performance depending on the degree of expectation that the result will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of an advantageous result based on the vibration intensity of the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the display period (3 seconds) of the cut-in image is the same as the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 while the cut-in image is displayed. (The ratio of the difference between the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the presentation button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach preview presentation). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a cut-in performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17, while a variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is possible. When the corresponding variable production (variable production in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, the cut-in production accompanied by the operation of the production button 17 or the vibration of the production button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17 The problem is that the execution of a cut-in effect accompanied by vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a cut-in performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17, while responding to the fluctuating display of normal symbols in the normal game state. When a variable effect (a variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, a cut-in effect that involves the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect One problem is that the execution of cut-in effects that involve vibration of the button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a cut-in performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17, while a variable performance (a variation of the first special symbol) is possible in the time-saving gaming state. A variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the display changes, a variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, a variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern are When a fluctuating fluctuating effect) is executed, a cut-in effect that involves the operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the execution of the performance is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

Also, although the cut-in effect is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the cut-in effect without generating a valid period. It may be possible to have only a weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, or when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol fluctuate. When the variable effect to be displayed is executed, a cut-in effect may be executed that involves operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17. In this case, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal gaming state. It is preferable to perform the variable effect at a lower rate than when the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of is executed.

Specifically, the operation of the production button 17 and the production are more effective when the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol is executed than the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. When a cut-in effect accompanied by vibration of the button 17 is executed at a lower rate, and a variable effect corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol is executed more than a variable effect corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol. The cut-in effect that involves the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 is executed at a lower rate, and the change-in effect corresponding to the loss change display of the normal symbol is performed at a lower rate than the change effect corresponding to the loss change display of the first special symbol. When the corresponding variable effect is executed, the cut-in effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 is executed at a lower rate than the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol. However, when the variable performance corresponding to the winning variation display of normal symbols is executed, it is better to perform the cut-in performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 at a lower rate.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 65, the fixed performance pattern determination table includes the gaming state, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), determination result (jackpot determination result, hit determination result), and variable performance pattern. The type, selection rate (%) of each determined performance pattern, and selected determined performance pattern are associated, and the performance configuration (effective suggestion performance, effective period, performance content) of each determined performance pattern is listed for reference. There is.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which button images are moved and displayed at 70, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the final performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggesting performance without executing the effective suggesting performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 4 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the production button 17 during the validity period, and "normal (white)" is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This indicates that the light is emitted in white color, which is less expected to give an advantageous result to the player. "Protruding (red)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding, and indicates that the production button 17 emits a red color that is highly expected to give an advantageous result to the player. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates a protruding state in which the effect button 17 is protruding, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color that is certain to give an advantageous result to the player.

The "performance content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed. )” indicates that the execution period of the performance related to the successful decision performance during the normal gaming state is 11 seconds, and the execution period of the performance related to the successful decision performance during the time-saving gaming state is 5 seconds. .

"Failure" in the column of the winning performance mode refers to a decision where the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, indicating that the result is not advantageous to the player (the jackpot game or the auxiliary game is not executed). This indicates that a failure performance will be executed.
“Success” means that a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, indicating that the result is advantageous to the player (a jackpot game or an auxiliary game is executed). indicates that it will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends. This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the time of 10 minutes, and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.
"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 and starts from the start of a successful performance (= at the time of operation of the performance button 17 or at the end of the valid period). This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) in which strong vibrations are performed for 4 seconds is to be executed.

"Strong motion" in the accessory motion column indicates that a strong motion is performed in which the first movable member 73a moves to the maximum motion position and emits rainbow-colored light.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).
"Rainbow light emission (5 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= at the time of operation of the effect button 17 or at the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 5 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).

The degree of expectation that the result of each promotion effect is advantageous to the player is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``protruding button rainbow.'' Further, the expectation level of an advantageous result for the player in each button state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a successful successful effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game or an auxiliary game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the valid period of the performance button 17 that occurs during the variable performance is the longest period. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the effect button 17 can be vibrated for the longest period as a strong vibration effect that occurs during a variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, the player's feeling of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a special performance (a type of operation performance, vibration performance, or role object movement performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17, vibration of the performance button 17, and role object movement. 2. When a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, the final performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, or the movement of a role object is performed. One of the points is that the performance is not executed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the execution of the determined performance accompanied by the action of the role model are restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a special performance (a type of operation performance, vibration performance, or role object movement performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17, vibration of the performance button 17, or movement of a role object. When a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of symbols (a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ fluctuates) is executed, a fixed performance that involves operation of the performance button 17, vibration of the performance button 17, or movement of a role object is not executed. In other words, the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the execution of a special performance that involves the movement of a role model are restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the time-saving gaming state (a variable performance in which the special symbol fluctuates), A specific performance (a type of operation performance, vibration performance, or role object movement performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, or the movement of a role object is not performed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 While the execution of a fixed performance accompanied by a function or an accessory action is restricted, when a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the time-saving gaming state. An advantage of the present invention is that it is possible to perform a fixed performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the movement of a role model. By doing this, in the time-saving gaming state where it is advantageous for the player to hit right, a fluctuating display of normal symbols (normal pattern fluctuation effect) that is performed when a game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 It is possible to promote the execution of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving gaming state (a variable performance in which the special symbol fluctuates), A specific performance (a type of operation performance, vibration performance, or role object movement performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, or the movement of a role object is not performed, that is, the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 While the execution of a fixed performance accompanied by a function or an accessory action is restricted, when a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the time-saving gaming state. An advantage of the present invention is that it is possible to perform a fixed performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the movement of a role model. By doing this, in the time-saving gaming state where it is advantageous for the player to hit right, a fluctuating display of normal symbols (normal pattern fluctuation effect) that is performed when a game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 It is possible to promote the execution of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the decision performance (decision success performance), an action performance using the first movable member 73a is performed, but an action performance using the second movable member 73b may be performed; In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the first movable member 73a is higher than that of the motion performance using the second movable member 73b.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates is executed, the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the action of the accessory are performed. A fixed performance may be executed, and in this case, it is preferable to perform it at a lower rate than when a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of normal symbols is executed in the time-saving game state.

Specifically, the operation of the production button 17 and the production button 17 are more effective when the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol is executed than the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the normal symbol. Deciding performances accompanied by vibrations and role-playing movements are executed at a lower rate, and when a fluctuating performance corresponding to the jackpot fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed than a fluctuating performance corresponding to the winning fluctuating display of the normal symbol. It is better to perform the determined performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17, the vibration of the performance button 17, and the movement of the accessory at a low rate.

(Re-lottery performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the re-lottery performance pattern determination table includes the game status, symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), presence or absence of promotion (planned to be promoted), and each re-lottery. The selection rate (%) of the performance pattern and the selected re-lottery performance pattern are associated with each other, and the performance configuration (valid suggestive performance, valid period, performance content) of each re-lottery performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the re-lottery performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 6 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 5 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Normal button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for promotion. "Normal (red)" indicates a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for promotion. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and indicates that the production button 17 emits a rainbow color indicating promotion.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed. This indicates that the performance period is 4 seconds.

"Promotion failure" in the re-lottery performance mode column refers to non-promoted symbols that do not result in an advantageous result for the player as a result of the re-lottery performance (for example, an even number symbol → even number symbol, an odd number symbol other than "7" → "7") '') is displayed (temporarily stopped) and an effect is performed in which a non-promoted sound effect is output.
"Successful promotion" means that a promotion symbol (for example, even number symbol → odd number symbol, odd number symbol other than "7" → "7" symbol) that will result in an advantageous result for the player as a result of the re-lottery performance is derived (temporary). (stop) and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the button light emission column means that the production button LED for causing the production button 17 to emit light is activated for 4 seconds (when the production button 17 is activated) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted over a period longer than the period of strong vibration.

The degree of expectation that the result of each promotion effect is advantageous to the player is "normal button white" < "normal button red" < "normal button rainbow".

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the result has been promoted to an advantageous result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a re-lottery performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17, while a variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is possible. When the corresponding variable production (variable production in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, the re-lottery production accompanied by the operation of the production button 17 or the vibration of the production button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the production button 17 Another problem is that execution of re-lottery effects accompanied by vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a re-lottery performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17, while responding to the fluctuating display of normal symbols in the normal game state. When a variable effect (a variable effect in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed, a re-lottery effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed, that is, the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect The problem is that the execution of the re-lottery effect accompanied by the vibration of the button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the first It is possible to promote the execution of the variable performance (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the special symbol fluctuate) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, it is possible to perform a re-lottery performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) that involves operation of the performance button 17 or vibration of the performance button 17; A variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the display changes, a variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, a variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern are When a fluctuating fluctuating effect) is executed, a re-lottery effect that involves operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the execution of the performance is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating a valid term.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is executed in which only the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol fluctuates, or when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol fluctuate. When the variable effect to be displayed is executed, a re-lottery effect may be executed that involves operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17. In this case, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal game state. It is preferable to perform the variable effect at a lower or higher rate than when the variable effect corresponding to the variable display is executed.

Specifically, the operation of the production button 17 and the production are more effective when the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol is executed than the variation production corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol. The re-lottery effect accompanied by the vibration of the button 17 is executed at a low or high rate, and the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol is executed more than the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol. In this case, the re-lottery effect that involves the operation of the effect button 17 and the vibration of the effect button 17 is performed at a low or high rate, and is more normal than the variable effect that corresponds to the loss variable display of the first special symbol. When a variable performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of losing symbols is executed, the re-lottery performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a low or high rate, and the first special symbol is When a variable effect corresponding to a winning variable display of a normal symbol is executed than a variable effect corresponding to a jackpot variable display, a re-lottery effect involving operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is performed at a lower rate. Alternatively, it is recommended to execute it at a high rate.

In addition, when a variable performance corresponding to the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is executed when a first jackpot game that is less advantageous to the player than the second jackpot game or the third jackpot game is executed. makes it possible to perform a re-lottery effect, and when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening pattern, which is less advantageous to the player than an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern, is executed, the re-lottery effect is executed again. The lottery effect may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66)
Here, the first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that during the normal symbol fluctuation display (second fluctuation display), the result is advantageous to the player (the hit determination result is It is possible to execute a suggested predetermined notice performance (for example, a decisive performance, etc.), and when a variable display of normal symbols (second variable display) is executed during the normal game state (first game state), the predetermined notice is executed. If the execution of a performance (for example, a winning performance, etc.) is restricted and a fluctuating display of normal symbols (second fluctuation display) is executed during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), a predetermined preview performance (for example, a winning performance, etc.) is By doing so, the performance effect is improved in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important to perform the fluctuating display of normal symbols. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that during the variable display of normal symbols (second variable display), the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, etc.) It is possible to perform a movement performance (for example, a successful decision movement) that moves in a predetermined manner (strong movement, weak movement, rattling movement), and it is possible to perform a fluctuating display of normal symbols (first game state) during the normal game state (first game state). 2 variation display) is executed, the execution of the motion performance (for example, successful decision motion, etc.) is restricted, and the variation display of normal symbols (second variation display) is executed during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state). In this case, it is possible to perform a movement performance (for example, a successful decision movement, etc.). By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) in which it is important to display the fluctuating symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

A third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that during the variable display (second variable display) of normal symbols, a predetermined operation effect (for example, If a fluctuating display of normal symbols (second fluctuating display) is executed during the normal gaming state (first gaming state), the execution of the operation performance (for example, deciding performance, etc.) is possible. The point is that when the variable display of normal symbols (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), operation effects (for example, deciding effects, etc.) can be executed. It will be done. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) in which it is important to display the fluctuating symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

A fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol provides an advantageous result for the player (jackpot determination It is possible to perform a predetermined preview performance (for example, a special performance in which a "BONUS approaching" display is performed) that suggests the result), and a variable display of the second special symbol can be performed during the normal gaming state (first gaming state). When executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during a time-saving game state (second game state) in which a predetermined advance notice performance (for example, a special performance in which a "BONUS approaching" display is performed) can be executed. In such a case, execution of a predetermined preview effect (for example, a special effect such as a display of "BONUS approaching") is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that the movable members (first movable member 73a, first movable member 73a, 2 movable member 73b, etc.) in the action production (for example, successful decision production, etc.), and the operation of the movable members (first movable member 73a, The point is that the motion of the second movable member 73b) can be made the same as the motion in the motion performance (for example, successful decision performance, etc.). By doing so, it becomes easier to understand that there is a high possibility that the result will be advantageous to the player due to the execution of the movement effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed, a predetermined operation effect (for example, a fixed effect, etc.) that causes the effect button 17 (operation means) to be operated is provided. ), and when a predetermined operation performance is executed, the performance button 17 can be vibrated in a predetermined manner. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when a predetermined operation performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that when a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed during the normal gaming state, a vibration effect in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined manner (for example, , vibration effects related to winning success effects, etc.), but when a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving gaming state, vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner (for example, An example of this is that it is possible to perform vibrating effects related to successful decisions, etc.). By doing this, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) in which it is important to display the fluctuating symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that the type of vibration effect of the effect button 17 that is executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal gaming state is , there are fewer types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 that are executed when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state, and to avoid the inconvenience that the performance effect is poor even when the variable display of the normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, light emission upon winning) that indicates in advance the result of the variable display of the first special symbol during the normal gaming state. The number of types of expectation levels in the predetermined look-ahead effects (icon change effect, winning light emission effect) that suggest in advance the result of the fluctuating display of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of types of expectation levels in the effect. There are a few points to mention. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state, and to avoid the inconvenience that the performance effect is poor even when the variable display of the normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that during the time-saving gaming state, a predetermined look-ahead effect (for example, a light-emitting effect upon winning) that indicates the result of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol in advance. ), the number of types of expectation levels in a predetermined look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the fluctuating display of normal symbols in advance (for example, a light-emitting effect when winning a prize) is greater than the number of types of expectation levels in ). It will be done. By doing this, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving gaming state where the fluctuating display of the normal symbols necessary to generate the second pending memory is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

An eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 66 is that when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal gaming state, a predetermined operation performance (for example, a decision performance, etc.) is executed. It is possible to vibrate the production button 17 in a predetermined manner when a predetermined operation production is executed, and it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 in a predetermined manner when a predetermined operation production is executed, and a predetermined operation when a variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal gaming state. The vibration mode of the performance button 17 (4 seconds vibration → 5 seconds vibration) in a performance (for example, a final performance, etc.) and the predetermined operation when a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed during a time-saving game state (for example, a final performance) It is possible to make the vibration mode (4 seconds vibration) of the production button 17 different from that in (etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the performance effect when the operation performance is executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the motion performance (for example, successful decision performance, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, etc.) that is performed when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed during the normal gaming state. In the operation of the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) performed when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving gaming state (for example, successful decision production, etc.) The operation may be made different. In this way, the performance effect of the motion performance can be made different between when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, the vibration mode of the performance button 17 in a predetermined operation performance (for example, a decision performance, etc.) when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal gaming state, and the variable display of the normal symbol during the time-saving gaming state When this is executed, the vibration mode of the performance button 17 in a predetermined operation performance (for example, final performance, etc.) may be the same. In this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the result is likely to be advantageous to the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving gaming state, the number of types of vibration effects of the production button 17 that are executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal gaming state. The number of types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 that are executed may be increased. In this way, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect in the time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is suggested that a specific performance (pseudo continuous performance, SP reach performance) will be executed as the icon display mode in the icon change performance that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the first special symbol during the normal gaming state. On the other hand, as a display mode of the icon in the icon change performance that indicates in advance the result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol during the time-saving gaming state, a specific display style (pseudo continuous performance, SP reach performance) is provided. It is also possible not to provide a specific display mode that suggests execution. In this way, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Third time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit)
The third time-saving performance process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the third time-saving performance process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time saving game state is in progress. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the process moves to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving game state, a third time-saving effect (RWM clear described later is not performed (it is deferred)). The current third time-saving performance processing is terminated as not to execute the suggested RWM clear negative performance and the activation counter display suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until shifting to the special time-saving game state.

In step E750-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has been started. If the variable production corresponding to the special symbol has not started, the process moves to step E750-16, and if the variable production corresponding to the special symbol has started, in step E750-3, RWM is executed when the power is turned on. It is determined whether clearing has been performed (whether a power-on designation command has been received). If RWM clearing has been performed, the process moves to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not performed, and if RWM clearing has been performed, the process moves to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is any history of a jackpot game being executed from the time the power was turned on to the present (whether or not a jackpot game was executed on the same day). If there is a jackpot history, the RWM clear negative performance is not executed and the process moves to step E750-13, and if there is no jackpot history, the process moves to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations until shifting to the third time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the third time-saving performance (RWM clear negative performance, activation counter display) is not executed and the process moves to step E750-16, and if it is within the predetermined number, step E750-6 Processing is transferred to .

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations in the fluctuation performance corresponding to the special symbol from the power restoration (receiving the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). . If the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the special symbol is not the first number, the process moves to step E750-10, and if the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the special symbol is the first number, step E750 -7, whether or not to execute the RWM clear negative performance and whether or not to display the activation counter are determined by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2).

In step E750-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it has been determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is determined not to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, the process moves to step E750-16, and if it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, step E750-9 At this point, an effect execution command corresponding to the determined result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a production execution command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the third time-saving production (RWM clear negative production and/or display of the activation counter) is performed. .

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations in the fluctuation performance corresponding to the special symbol from the power restoration (receiving the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). . If the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the special symbol is not the second number, the process moves to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the special symbol is the second number, clear the RWM. It is determined whether or not to execute a negative performance and whether or not to display an activation counter. Specifically, if the RWM clear negative effect has not been executed, it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect, and if the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it is determined to execute the display of the activation counter.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command according to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a production execution command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the third time-saving production (RWM clear negative production and/or display of the activation counter) is performed. .

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of variations in the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol from power ON is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of variations in the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol is the second number, the process moves to step E750-15, and if the number of variations is not the second number, in step E750-14, the process is changed from the time-saving gaming state. It is determined whether the transition to production mode A has been made. If the time-saving gaming state has shifted to production mode A, the process moves to step E750-15, and if the time-saving gaming state has not shifted to production mode A, the process moves to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a production execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the third time-saving production (in this case, display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (whether or not a symbol confirmation command for a special symbol is received). If the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, the process moves to step E750-17, and if the effect pattern is not stopped and displayed, the current third time-saving effect process is ended.

In step E750-17, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, the current third time-saving effect processing is ended, and if the activation counter is being displayed, the activation counter subtraction command is sent to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step E750-18. set. As a result, an activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. When this process is finished, the current third time-saving effect process is ended.

In this way, while the variable effect is being executed a predetermined number of times since the power is turned on (the predetermined number of times before the third time-saving gaming state is activated), RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) is executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute an RWM clear negative effect that suggests that there is no (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the third time-saving gaming state occurs with reference to the number of fluctuations on the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, a plurality of execution timings for the RWM clear negative effect are set, and if it is executed at any timing, it will not be executed again at any other timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectations regarding at what timing the RWM clear negative performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display a suggested activation counter by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the third time-saving game state (activation countdown effect can be executed). Therefore, the player can grasp when the third time-saving gaming state will occur, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to provide motivation for continuing the game, and it is also possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, the activation counter is not displayed until the variable performance is executed a predetermined number of times (minimum 50 times, maximum 100 times) from the time the power is turned on (regardless of whether RWM is cleared or not). Therefore, for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on at the start of business hours at the game parlor, it is impossible to determine whether the RWM clear is not being executed or not. This makes it possible to suppress inconveniences such as a decrease in In addition, the player can also play the game with a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game will be fixed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the time saving game state, the activation counter is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's attention is directed toward the third time-saving game state even though the player is in the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, even if the time-saving game state changes to the normal game state, the activation counter is not displayed until the game changes to production mode A. Therefore, it is possible to leave a feeling of having transitioned from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the activation counter display after the transition to production mode A, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game with a fresh start, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the activation counter is decremented (countdown) not at the start of a variable performance where a preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started), but when a performance pattern stops where a notice performance or look-ahead performance is difficult to be executed (started) than at the start of a fluctuation. ), it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply that was stopped during the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state is restarted and the gaming control state is restored to the state before the power outage, then the RWM related to the presence or absence of RWM clear While it is possible to execute a clear negative performance (specific performance), the power supply that was stopped during the normal gaming state after the end of the third time-saving gaming state is restarted, and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power outage occurred. When the state is restored, subsequent execution of an RWM clear negative effect (specific effect) relating to the presence or absence of RWM clear is restricted. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the RWM clear negative effect, it is possible to notify the player of useful information such as the fact that the third time-saving gaming state has ended and whether or not the RWM has been cleared, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, the power supply that occurred while being controlled to any production mode (production mode A to D, countdown mode) in the normal gaming state is restarted, and the gaming control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred. In this case, the power supply is controlled to production mode A which is the initial production mode, but the power supply that was stopped while being controlled to production mode other than production mode A (normal gaming state) after the end of the time-saving gaming state is When the game is restarted and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage and is controlled to production mode A, then execute an RWM clear negative production (specific production) related to the presence or absence of RWM clear. On the other hand, the power supply that was stopped while being controlled to a production mode other than production mode A (normal gaming state) after the end of the third time-saving gaming state is restarted, and the control state of the game is changed from a power outage. When the state before the occurrence is restored and the performance mode A is controlled, subsequent execution of RWM clear negative performance (specific performance) related to the presence or absence of RWM clear is restricted. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the RWM clear negative effect, it is possible to notify the player of useful information such as the fact that the third time-saving gaming state has ended and whether or not the RWM has been cleared, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Note that instead of subtracting (counting down) the activation counter when the performance symbols stop, the activation counter may be subtracting (countdown) at the start of the variable performance. In this case, the activation counter may be subtracted from when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate until it completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes a constant speed), or when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate, it may cause fluctuations such as rising. The scrolling (variation) may be performed after the pre-movement is performed, and the activation counter may be decremented by the time the pre-variation action is completed.

In addition, instead of executing an RWM clear negative effect that suggests that RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) is not being executed (deferred), the setting value is changed (setting change accompanied by RWM clearing is not executed). A setting change suggestion performance may be executed to suggest that the RWM clear has been changed (instead of a setting change suggestion effect), or both the RWM clear denial effect and the setting change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery. However, it is preferable to restrict that both the RWM clear negative performance and the setting change suggestion performance are performed in the same variable performance.

(Example of performance when waiting for a customer during normal gaming mode)
Using FIG. 68, an explanation will be given of an example of the performance when the player is in a customer waiting state during the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the special symbols TZ displayed on the first image display device 70 include a first special symbol TZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol, a second special symbol TZ2 corresponding to the second special symbol, A third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the normal symbol is set.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the variation time of the first special symbol that results in a loss has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at a loss ("134"), and the icon display area 70C The icon TI corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(b), when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the state is set to wait for a customer, and when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, one of the effects while waiting for a customer is activated. , an adjustment guide image CA is displayed using a cross key image imitating the cross key 19 and character images to guide adjustment operations of the volume and light intensity by operating the cross key 19.

After that, when a game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 and the variable display of the normal pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the pattern 70a is not executed, A variable performance (game performance) in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner is started. At this time, since the variable display of the normal symbols has started in the normal gaming state, the customer waiting state is maintained and the adjustment guide image CA continues to be displayed.

Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. A waiting demonstration performance begins. Specifically, a customer waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a help time indicating that the gaming machine is equipped with "help time", which is a coined word indicating the third time-saving gaming state. A guide image AN is displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is not executed, but the variable effect of the first special symbol TZ1 is executed, and the variable effect of the second special symbol is not executed. During the display or during the variable display of the normal symbols, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern 70a is executed, so the customer waits because the variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol are not executed. state. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state is maintained and the customer waiting effect (display of adjustment guide image CA, customer waiting demonstration effect, help time guide image AN display, etc.) will be executed.

In this way, in the normal gaming state (performance modes A to D), when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed, the customer waiting performance (display of adjustment guide image CA, customer waiting demonstration performance, help time guidance) is executed. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the execution of the customer waiting performance is restricted when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is being executed. Therefore, the customer waiting performance can be executed at an appropriate timing that matches the performance situation on the first image display device 70, and it is possible to exert the desired appeal effect to the players.

In addition, in the normal game state (performance modes A to D), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the customer waiting performance (display of adjustment guide image CA, customer waiting demonstration performance, help time guidance) (display of image AN, etc.) is restricted, and in the time-saving game state, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, the customer waiting performance can be executed at an appropriate timing that matches the performance situation on the first image display device 70, and it is possible to exert the desired appeal effect to the players.

In addition, in the normal gaming state (performance modes A to D), even when the customer waiting performance is being executed, the customer waiting performance (display of adjustment guide image CA, customer waiting demonstration performance, help time It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the normal symbol without interrupting the display of the guide image AN, etc.). Therefore, the player does not need to be aware of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, which are not considered important in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when look-ahead effect is executed during normal gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 69, an example of a performance when a prefetch performance is executed during the normal gaming state will be described. Here, it is assumed that an icon change effect and a look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), a game ball enters the first start opening 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss (execution of the variable effect), and the first pending memory changes from "1" to " 2", the main control board 110 sends winning commands (first reserved number designation command, first special drawing pre-reading designation command) to the production control board 130, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E is increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (pending icon HI ) is additionally displayed.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are stopped and displayed at a loss ("814"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that was previously displayed is deleted.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that loses is started, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started. is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are directed toward the icon display area 70C. The icons are shifted and displayed, and the first one is displayed as the relevant icon TI.

At this time, an icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the pre-reading zone effect is started and the background image changes to the pre-reading zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(d), the effect pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are stopped and displayed at a loss ("531"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that was previously displayed is deleted.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a jackpot (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started. is started, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is displayed and changes to a red icon (special icon).

At this time, when a game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 and the variable display of the normal pattern starts, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in a variable manner) In parallel with the variable presentation), a variable presentation (game presentation) in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed without the variable display of the presentation symbol 70a is started.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state forming a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased) and the prefetch zone effect is interrupted. Further, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at the number of the losing number ("243").

Then, when the final phase of the SPSP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect image SED suggesting an advantageous result to the player is displayed, and the audio output device A notification sound of "Kuinkyuin" is output from 9 (here, it is announced that it will be a jackpot).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the winning successful production is completed, the production pattern 70a is set to the special appearance common to the small hit and the jackpot ( "555"), the prefetch zone effect is resumed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. , the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a winning number ("555") that does not include "V" indicating a small win. Furthermore, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, when the final phase of the SPSP reach effect (the execution timing of the effect that decides whether or not it is a loss) is reached, the failure effect is started and the ally character C2 becomes the enemy character. A performance of losing to C3 is performed. After that, when the character screen "Defeat" is displayed and the winning result is notified and the winning failure performance ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the reaching loss result (for example, "565"). become.

In addition, when a game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern holding memory (F) increases, the main control board 110 sends a command at the time of winning to the production control board 130 (common pattern holding number designation command, However, if a game ball enters the general game gate 44 during the normal gaming state and the general game reservation memory (F) increases, the standard game reservation number display area 70G Although the number is updated to increase, the general figure pending icon is not additionally displayed, so the general figure pending icon change effect is not executed.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second reservation memory (U2) increases, the main control board 110 sends a winning command (second reservation number designation command) to the production control board 130. , second special figure pre-reading designation command) is transmitted, but if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state and the second reservation memory (U2) increases, the second reservation number Although the number in the display area 70F is updated to increase, the pending icon is not additionally displayed, so the pending icon change effect is not executed.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state, pre-read effects (icon change effects, pre-read zone effects, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectations when a jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the normal gaming state (first gaming state) (the first acquisition condition is met), the first effect display ( For example, a look-ahead effect such as an icon change effect) and a second effect display (display of the number of pending items in the pending icon display area or the pending number display area) according to the second command (command for specifying the number of pending items) are executed. , If a game ball enters the general game gate 44 during the normal gaming state (first gaming state) (the second acquisition condition is met), the first effect display (for example, Execution of look-ahead effects such as icon change effects is restricted, but the second effect display (display of the number of pending items in the pending icon display area or pending number display area) is executed in response to the second command (pending number specification command). It is now possible to do so. Therefore, the performance can be made different between when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), when performing a variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are variably displayed in response to the first special symbol, the normal pattern is Correspondingly, it is possible to execute a variable effect in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), the player can recognize each of the variable displays of a plurality of symbols on the image display device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), the number of types of the third special symbol TZ3 (9 types from 1 to 9), which is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the normal symbol, is higher than the number of types of the first special symbol TZ3. The number of types of performance symbols 70a that are displayed in a corresponding manner (1 to 9 + pseudo-continuous symbols that are temporarily stopped when a pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and the number of types of performance symbols 70a that are displayed variably (temporarily) to indicate the type of jackpot game when a jackpot occurs) ) 11 kinds of jackpot suggesting symbols that are stopped) are more common. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance mode A to D), the performance pattern 70a is hidden during specific performances such as development performance, deciding performance, jackpot performance, etc., while various special symbols (first special pattern TZ1 , second special symbol TZ2, and third special symbol TZ3) are always displayed without being hidden during specific performances such as development performances, deciding performances, and jackpot performances. Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are not displayed, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game (the presence or absence of variable display, etc.) from the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), the performance symbol 70a that is variably displayed in response to the first special symbol is displayed as a result (jackpot result) that suggests an advantageous result to the player. When the first special symbol TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol, it is possible to display the first special symbol TZ1 with a result that suggests an advantageous result to the player (jackpot result). . Therefore, regardless of whether the player is looking at the production symbol 70a or the first special symbol TZ1, the player can understand that the result is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variably displayed in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, a specific light emitting part ( While the first movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification effect (successful decision effect) in which the first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific color (rainbow color), the third special symbol TZ3 is varied in response to the winning variation display of the normal symbol. In the variable effect to be displayed, a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which a specific light emitting section (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific color (rainbow color) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variably displayed in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, a specific movable member ( The first movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which the first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operation mode, while a variable performance in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variably displayed in response to the winning variation display of the normal symbol. In this case, a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operation mode is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variably displayed in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, a specific performance sound ( While it is possible to execute a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which a "Kyuinkyuin" ("Kuinkyuin") indicating that the result is advantageous to the player is output, a third special symbol is displayed in response to the win fluctuation display of the normal symbol. In the variable performance that fluctuates and displays TZ3, a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific performance sound ("kyuinkyuin" indicating a result that is advantageous to the player) is output is no longer executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variably displayed in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device specifies While it is possible to execute a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a performance image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed, a special notification performance (decision success performance) in which a performance image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed, 3. In the variable performance in which the special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner, a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific performance image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed is not executed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the variable display of the first special symbol is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), if a variable performance is performed in which the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed in a variable manner in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the result of the variable performance is While a special effect suggesting (BONUS approaching display) is executed, a variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, and a change in the hit variation of the normal symbol. When a variable effect is performed in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner in response to the display, a special effect (BONUS approaching display) indicating the result of the variable effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when look-ahead effect ends midway during normal gaming state)
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a case where the prefetch performance ends midway during the normal gaming state. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the prefetch zone effect are executed as a result of the prefetch determination based on the winning in the first start opening 45.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable production) is started, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started, and the first reserved number display area 70E The number decreases from "2" to "1", the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the corresponding icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the corresponding icon. Displayed as icon TI.

At this time, an icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the pre-reading zone effect is started and the background image changes to the pre-reading zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second reservation memory increases from "0" to "1", the number in the second reservation number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1". After that, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are stopped and displayed at a loss ("531"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that was previously displayed is deleted.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol that results in a loss starts, the look-ahead zone effect ends midway and the background image changes to the normal one, as shown in FIG. 70(c). At the same time as returning to the medium background image, the icon change effect is terminated midway and the blue icon returns to the normal icon. Further, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 is started, and the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". In addition, since the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol has started in the normal gaming state, the icon is not displayed.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the production pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 are stopped and displayed at a loss ("632"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI that was previously displayed is deleted.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a jackpot is started, as shown in FIG. 70(e), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started. is started, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is displayed.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (the production symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 In parallel with the variable performance in which the second special symbol TZ2 is variably displayed without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, a variable performance (game performance) in which the second special symbol TZ2 is variably displayed is started.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased). Further, when the variable time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at the number of the losing number ("462").

Then, when the final phase of the SPSP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect image SED suggesting an advantageous result to the player is displayed, and the audio output device A notification sound of "Kuinkyuin" is output from 9 (here, it is announced that it will be a jackpot).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the successful production is completed, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops when the winning number ("555") is reached, as shown in FIG. 70(i). However, at the same time as the prefetch zone effect is restarted, the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed.

After that, when a temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(j), the production pattern 70a stops and displays at a hit ("555"), and the special symbol TZ shows a small hit. The display will stop at a winning number ("555") that does not include the "V" indicating "V". Furthermore, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, when the final phase of the SPSP reach effect (the execution timing of the effect that decides whether or not it is a loss) is reached, the failure effect is started and the ally character C2 becomes the enemy character. A performance of losing to C3 is performed. After that, when the character screen "Defeat" is displayed and the winning result is notified and the winning failure performance ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the reaching loss result (for example, "565"). become.

In this way, during the execution of a pre-reading effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect, etc.) that makes the player expect to execute a jackpot game over one or more variable effects that are started based on winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and variable display of the second special symbol is started, the pre-read performance is ended midway. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes unclear which variable display the pre-read performance is intended for, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), when performing a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variably displayed in response to the first special symbol, the second special symbol It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the symbol. Therefore, in the normal game state (performance modes A to D), the player can recognize each of the variable displays of a plurality of symbols on the image display device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to D), the number of types of the second special symbol TZ2 that is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol (9 types from 1 to 9) is higher than that of the first special symbol. The number of types of performance symbols 70a that are variably displayed in accordance with the symbols (1 to 9 + pseudo-continuous symbols that are temporarily stopped when a pseudo-continuous performance is executed, to indicate the type of jackpot game when a jackpot occurs) (11 kinds of jackpot suggesting symbols that will be temporarily stopped) are more numerous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state (performance modes A to D), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal performance mode A to D), the performance pattern 70a is hidden during specific performances such as development performance, deciding performance, jackpot performance, etc., while various special symbols (first special pattern TZ1 , second special symbol TZ2, and third special symbol TZ3) are always displayed without being hidden during specific performances such as development performances, deciding performances, and jackpot performances. Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are not displayed, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game (presence or absence of variable display, etc.) from the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the pre-reading performance that started based on the winning in the first starting opening 45, the winning in the second starting opening 47 will not be terminated midway through the pre-reading presentation. The look-ahead presentation may be terminated midway at the time when the first special symbol is displayed, or the first special may be stopped after the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed at the time when the second start opening 47 was won. The pre-reading effect may be terminated midway when the symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pre-reading effect may be terminated when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

(Example of performance when variable performance is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIGS. 71 and 72, an example of a performance in a case where a variable performance is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state will be described.

When the ending of the second jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 71(a), a time-saving rush effect is executed that suggests a time-saving game state, and a warning is also given to call the player's attention. An alert notification is executed. Specifically, a forgetting caution image TG for alerting the user to forget to take out a card (storage medium) that can identify the balance of value from a lending device that performs game ball lending communication with the gaming machine 1 is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is being executed, and the fluctuating performance in which the third special symbol TZ3 is fluctuatingly displayed without the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is being performed.

Thereafter, when the display period of the forget-to-take caution image TG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71(b), an absorption caution image NG is displayed to alert the player to excessive absorption in the game. Then, when the ending time of the second jackpot game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71(c), 50 times is set as the remaining number of time saving games (G), and the first pending memory (U1) is set to "1". The first time-saving game state is started with the second pending memory (U2) being "0", and the performance symbol 70a, which is the winning result that was stopped and displayed before the previous jackpot game, is displayed in the time-saving mode (mode A) background. The image, the first right-handed image MG1 that prompts to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the remaining number of times image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving game remaining number (G) are displayed as "50 remaining". Ru. In addition, during the time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) and the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) are not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(d), when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol TZ1 is started without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, The number in the first reservation number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0". However, due to the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol, the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of time saving regular symbols (G) maintains the state of "50 remaining".

At this time, when four game balls enter the regular game ball gate 44 and the regular game ball holding memory (F) increases from "0" to "4", the number in the standard game holding number display area 70G changes from "0" to "4". The number of white icons is increased to "4", and four white icons (pending icons HI) are additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D. Further, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing normal symbol, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed as a losing number ("265").

Then, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. . Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "50 times remaining" to "49 times remaining". Moreover, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol TZ1 is stopped and displayed as a losing number ("513").

After that, when one game ball enters the general game gate 44 and the general game ball holding memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the general game holding number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ", and one white icon (pending icon) is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

In addition, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed at the losing number ("413"), as shown in FIG. 71(f). do. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, when the losing fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, and the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G is decreased from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. Ru. Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "49 times remaining" to "48 times remaining".

Then, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed at the losing number ("962"), as shown in FIG. 71(h). do. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the general game gate 44 and the general game ball holding memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the standard game holding number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ", and one white icon (pending icon) that is the target of the pre-reading effect is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D. At this time, a winning lighting effect is performed, the top lamp 10b emits white light, and a warning sound effect "Jowa" is output.

Next, when the losing fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. is decreased from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. Ru. Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "48 times remaining" to "47 times remaining".

Then, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. do. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. The number is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI, The pending icon change effect is executed, and the white icon that was the target of the prefetch effect changes to a blue icon. Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "47 times remaining" to "46 times remaining".

Next, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 stop at the losing number (“192”), as shown in FIG. 71(l). indicate. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the general game gate 44 and the general game ball reservation memory (F) increases from "2" to "3", the number in the standard game reservation number display area 70G changes from "2" to "3". ", and one white icon (pending icon) is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

Then, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 72(m), the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started, and the numbers in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G are The number is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. . Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "46 times remaining" to "45 times remaining".

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed at the losing number ("561"), as shown in FIG. 72(n). do. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when two game balls enter the game ball gate 44 and the game ball holding memory (F) increases from "2" to "4", the number in the game ball holding number display area 70G changes from "2" to "4". ", and three white icons (pending icons) are additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

Next, when the winning variation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. is decreased from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. , the icon change effect is executed, and the blue icon that was the target of the prefetch effect changes to a red icon. Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "45 times remaining" to "44 times remaining".

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(p), a chance effect is started in which the effect pattern 70a is hidden. Specifically, a character image reading "Attack Chance" is displayed to suggest (notify) that there is a possibility of an advantageous outcome for the player. After that, when the execution timing of the decisive performance in the chance performance comes, a valid suggestion performance is performed that suggests that the validity period may occur.

Thereafter, when the effective suggestion effect ends, the effective period of the decisive effect occurs and a promotion effect prompting the user to operate the effect button 17 is executed, as shown in FIG. 72(q). Specifically, a button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed. Further, a character image saying "Press the button!" is displayed, and a voice saying "Press the button" is output.

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(r), a success effect is started and the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and An effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player is displayed, and a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is output from the audio output device 9 (here, the result is advantageous to the player (second start). It is announced that an auxiliary game in which the mouth 47 is opened in a long opening pattern will be executed).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the successful performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 72(s), three performance symbols 70a are aligned, resulting in an advantageous result for the player. The game is temporarily stopped at a hit roll ("555") indicating that the game is in the game, and the icon display area 70C and the normal pattern pending icon display area 70D are re-displayed. Also, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 will be hit ("555") as shown in FIG. 72(t). Stop display. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the time-saving gaming state is generated, the time-saving entry effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game, and the right hit notification is performed before the time-saving gaming state occurs (during the jackpot game). . Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the time-saving gaming state will occur, and it is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to playing left-handed when the time-saving gaming state occurs. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a time-saving gaming state is generated, an attention-raising effect (displaying a forgetting caution image TG, displaying an ``obsessed caution image NG'') to alert the player is performed, and then a performance (background) corresponding to the time-saving state is performed. (image change, display of the remaining number of times image KG, right hit notification, variable performance according to the time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to the performance mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively alert the players.

In addition, during the time-saving game state, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the normal symbol, but when the time-saving game state is started, When the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) is not subtracted, so the variable effect in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is executed. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the first normal symbol from which the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) is subtracted after the time-saving gaming state is started, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. It is now possible to perform variable effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, a reservation icon (reservation information) corresponding to the normal figure reservation memory (F) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the number of normal symbols held in memory related to the fluctuating display of normal symbols, which is one of the conditions for ending the time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the icon (execution information) corresponding to the normal pattern determination information for which the variable display of the normal pattern has started is displayed (the pending icon is changed to the corresponding icon). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect that suggests in advance the result of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal pattern holding memory (F), by changing the display mode of the normal pattern holding icon, it is possible to obtain an advantageous result for the player. It is possible to perform a suggested icon change effect. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to expect that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols will result in an advantageous result, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), when performing a variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the normal symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in response to the first special symbol. It is possible to perform a variable effect in which the first special symbol TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the player can recognize each of the variable displays of a plurality of symbols on the image display device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving production modes A to C), the number of types of the first special symbol TZ1 that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol (9 types from 1 to 9) is higher than that of the normal symbol. Correspondingly, the number of types of effect symbols 70a that are variably displayed (10 types of win suggesting symbols that are (tentatively) stopped to suggest the type of win when a win occurs from 1 to 9+) is larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance pattern 70a is hidden during specific performances such as development performance, deciding performance, jackpot performance, etc., while various special symbols (first special pattern TZ1 , second special symbol TZ2, and third special symbol TZ3) are always displayed without being hidden during specific performances such as development performances, deciding performances, and jackpot performances. Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are not displayed, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game (the presence or absence of variable display, etc.) from the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance symbols 70a, which are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the normal symbols, are displayed with a result (hit result) that suggests an advantageous result to the player. It is possible to display the third special symbol TZ3, which is variably displayed in correspondence with the normal symbol, with an outcome (jackpot outcome) that suggests an advantageous result to the player. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is looking at the production symbol 70a or the first special symbol TZ1, the player can understand that the result is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the winning variation display of the normal symbol, a specific light emitting part (the first While the movable member 73a) can perform a specific notification effect (successful decision effect) in which the movable member 73a) emits light in a specific color (rainbow color), the first special symbol TZ1 is varied in response to the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In the variable effect to be displayed, a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which a specific light emitting section (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific color (rainbow color) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state where variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the winning variation display of the normal symbol, a specific movable member (the first While the movable member 73a) can execute a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which the movable member 73a) operates in a specific operation mode, a variable performance in which the first special symbol TZ1 is variably displayed in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol. In this case, a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operation mode is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state where variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving production modes A to C), in the variable production in which the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the winning variation display of the normal symbol, a specific production sound (player It is possible to execute a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which "Kuinkyuin" (which suggests an advantageous result) is output, while the first special symbol is displayed in response to the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In the variable performance that fluctuates and displays TZ1, a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific performance sound ("kyuinkyuin" indicating a result that is advantageous to the player) is output is no longer executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving game state where variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), in the variable performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the jackpot fluctuation display of the normal symbol, a specific performance is displayed on the image display device. While it is possible to perform a specific notification effect (decision success effect) in which an image (effect image SED suggesting that the result is advantageous to the player) is displayed, the first special notification effect corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is 1. In a variable performance in which the special symbol TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner, a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific performance image (effect image SED suggesting an advantageous result to the player) is displayed is not executed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance symbol 70a that is variably displayed in correspondence with the normal symbol corresponds to the first special symbol in the normal game state (normal performance mode A to C). It is arranged to be displayed at the same position as the effect pattern 70a which is variably displayed. Therefore, the performance symbols can be displayed in a variable manner between the normal game state and the time-saving game state without any discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the player is in a customer waiting state at the start of the time-saving game state after transitioning from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the time-saving game state may be muted without being audibly output. . In this case, when a game ball enters the game ball into the game gate 44 from the customer waiting state and a game ball is stored as a game ball and a fluctuating performance is started, the BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the time-saving game state can be heard. All you have to do is output it.

In addition, although the warning performance is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the warning performance may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game to the time-saving game state, or immediately after the start of the time-saving game state ( (during the first fluctuation effect), or the forgetting caution image TG and the engrossed caution image NG may be displayed in sequence during the attention raising effect (whichever is displayed). may be displayed first).

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time-saving gaming state, a variable effect is executed in which the first special symbol TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the time-saving gaming state where it is important to execute the variable display of the normal symbol, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when multiple performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the normal pattern fluctuation performance during the time-saving game state, it is possible to cause the background image to perform the performance operation, and the background image can perform the performance operation on the multiple performance symbols that are performing the performance operation. is temporarily stopped and a specific number (for example, three) of normal pattern hold icons that are two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) are displayed, multiple commands (normal pattern) sent from the main control board 110 A situation occurs in which the symbol confirmation command, command at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display (common symbol reservation number specification command, normal symbol designation command, common symbol fluctuation pattern specification command, etc.) cannot be received normally (missing), and then When a command (command for specifying the number of reserved symbols, ordinary symbol designation command, or ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received at the start of the variable display of ordinary symbols in which the ordinary symbol retention memory (F) becomes a predetermined number (for example, one). , Starts the general pattern variation performance (variable performance accompanied by variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the third special symbol), displays the standard pattern hold icon one less than the specific number (for example, three), and then displays a predetermined number. A number (for example, one) of general drawing reservation icons may be displayed.

(Example 1 of a performance after an advantageous result is announced to the player in a normal pattern fluctuation performance during a time-saving game state)
Referring to FIG. 73, an explanation will be given of performance example 1 (case where the stock chance performance is not executed) after the player is notified of an advantageous result in the regular pattern variation performance during the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), after the winning success effect is executed in the normal pattern variation effect, when the normal symbol variation time elapses and the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the third special The symbol TZ3 temporarily stops when it hits a hit ("555"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is started, as shown in FIG. At the same time as the right-handed image MG3 is displayed, a limit notification corresponding to the remaining period of the auxiliary game (the remaining time in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 47) is started. Specifically, a count image CG is displayed at the upper left of the first image display device 70, and a countdown is performed as time passes, and the display size is enlarged.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. The value increases from 0 to 1. In addition, a special winning sound (``vacuum''), which is a type of look-ahead effect, is output, and an advantageous state acquisition effect indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state is executed. Specifically, a character image of "BONUS" indicating an advantageous situation for the player is displayed without using a character image of a small win or a big win.

In addition, if the result of the pre-read judgment of the special figure judgment information acquired when the game ball enters the second starting opening 47 is a jackpot or a small win, the same special winning sound is output and it is a loss. In this case, the special winning sound is not output, but the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 is not determined to be a loss, but is determined to be a jackpot or small win. In this case, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a special winning sound may be outputted without fail.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a small hit (super shortened variation) starts before the auxiliary game ends, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the second special symbol TZ2 is started without the variable display of the symbol 70a. Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped and displayed at the small hit number ("5V5") as shown in FIG. 73(e). do.

After that, when the opening of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 73(f), the opening effect is started and a second right-hitting notification is sent to prompt the player to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. (Display of second right-handed hitting image MG2, output of “right-handed hitting” sound) is executed. Then, when the round game of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. The display is updated.

Here, if the game ball that won in the first big prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, it becomes a jackpot game with the small winning game as the first round, and the small winning game is the first round. When the winning game ends, the second round starts and the round performance continues. In addition, when shifting from a small winning game to a jackpot game, the ending effect of the small winning game will not be executed.

On the other hand, during a small winning game, the game ball does not enter the first large winning hole 50, or the game ball that enters the first large winning hole does not pass through the specific area 53 and the first large winning hole 50 closes. When it is closed, as shown in FIG. 73(h), a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the ending period of the small winning game. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the door image closes, and it is reported that the small winning game has ended and the transition to the jackpot game has not been made.

Then, when the ending of the small winning game ends, as shown in FIG. A) The background image will be displayed.

In this way, from the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, that is, before the start of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the special symbol determination information acquired at this time, the special, which is a type of look-ahead presentation, is started. A winning sound (``vacuum'') is output, and an advantageous condition acquisition effect (BONUS display) indicating that the player will be in an advantageous condition is executed. Therefore, it is possible to impress upon the player that it is advantageous for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the time-saving gaming state can be ended if any of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), and the third ending condition among the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied (time-saving small hit remaining). When the time-saving gaming state ends with the number of times=0), execution of a specific display (result display) showing the results of the games in a series of advantageous periods is restricted. Therefore, by suppressing the gaming method of aiming for other jackpot games or small win games that are likely to be advantageous without letting the game ball pass through the specific area 53 in the small win game, fair games are provided to the players. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, light emitting effect upon winning) related to the normal figure hold memory (F) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), the second hold memory (U2) The expectation is that the results will be more advantageous to the player if such pre-read effects (output of a special winning sound (“vacuum”), advantageous state acquisition effect indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state, etc.) are executed. The level is getting higher. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations when the prefetch effect related to the second pending memory (U2) is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a specific variation pattern (super shortening variation) during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), the second special symbol is displayed without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. A variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the special symbol TZ2 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed, and to give the impression that a small winning game or a jackpot game has started immediately after the auxiliary game has been executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example 2 of a performance after the player is notified of an advantageous result in a regular pattern fluctuation performance during a time-saving game state)
With reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, performance example 2 (case where the stock chance performance is not executed) after the player is notified of an advantageous result in the regular pattern variation performance during the time-saving game state will be described.

First, after the winning success performance is executed in the normal pattern variation performance, when the normal symbol variation time has passed and the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 will appear as a hit (" 555''), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens in a long opening pattern is started, as shown in FIG. At the same time as the right-handed image MG3 is displayed, a limit notification corresponding to the remaining period of the auxiliary game (the remaining time in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 47) is started. Specifically, a count image CG is displayed at the upper left of the first image display device 70, and a countdown is performed as time passes, and the display size is enlarged.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. The value increases from 0 to 1. In addition, a special winning sound (``vacuum''), which is a type of look-ahead effect, is output, and an advantageous state acquisition effect indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state is executed. Specifically, a character image of "BONUS" indicating an advantageous situation for the player is displayed without using a character image of a small win or a big win.

Next, before the auxiliary game ends, when the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a small hit (in this case, short stock chance variation) starts, as shown in FIG. 74(c), an advantageous state acquisition effect is displayed. A stock chance variation performance is started in which the second special symbol TZ2 is variably displayed without the variation display of the performance symbol 70a while continuing. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(d), the fact that a state advantageous to the player (a small win or a big win) has been stocked, and the second reservation memory (U2) in which a state that is almost advantageous to the player can be acquired is stocked. An image of the text "BONUS Stock + Stock Opportunity Entering" is displayed, indicating that the stock opportunity is entering with a possibility of

After that, when the stock chance effect starts with the start of the ending of the auxiliary game, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the stock of "V x 1" indicating that there is one BONUS stock The stock chance background image is displayed along with the notification image. In addition, a production pattern 70a smaller than the normal size is displayed, and a general design reservation icon display area 70D is displayed in which a number of reservation icons according to the icon display area 70C and the regular design reservation memory (F) are displayed. Ru.

Then, when the ending period of the auxiliary game ends and the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, The number in the figure reservation number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserve icons HI displayed in the general figure reservation icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. One is displayed as the relevant icon TI. At this time, the remaining number of times image KG indicating the remaining number of time-saving regular cards is not displayed because the stock chance performance is being performed.

Next, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 stop at the losing number ("892"), as shown in FIG. 74(g). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area is deleted. In addition, when one game ball enters the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern holding memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the general pattern holding number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ", and one white icon (pending icon) is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

In addition, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. .

Next, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 stop at the losing number (“158”), as shown in FIG. 74(i). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area is deleted. In addition, when one game ball enters the general pattern gate 44 and the general pattern holding memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the general pattern holding number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ", and one white icon (pending icon) is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

Then, when the winning fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 74(j), the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, and the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G changes. The number decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. .

Next, when the variation time of the normal symbol has passed and the normal winning symbol stops displaying, as shown in FIG. The icon TI displayed in the icon display area is deleted. Further, an auxiliary game is started in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern.

After that, after the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is started, one game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second holding memory increases from "0" to "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 75(l), the number in the second reservation number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1", indicating that the player has stocked an advantageous state (small win or big win). The stock increase effect shown is executed. Specifically, the character image "Stock+1" is displayed, and the stock notification image is updated to "V×2".

Then, when the auxiliary game ends and the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. The number in the display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the corresponding icon display area 70C, and one of the corresponding icons is displayed. Displayed as icon TI.

In addition, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed at the losing number ("158"), as shown in FIG. 75(n). Then, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area is deleted. In addition, when one game ball enters the general game gate 44 and the general game ball holding memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the standard game holding number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ", and one white icon (pending icon) is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

After that, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts, as shown in FIG. 4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the corresponding icon TI.

Next, at a predetermined time before the end of the stock chance performance, as shown in FIG. 75(p), an end suggestion performance that suggests the end of the stock chance is started by ending the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a midway. , a text image saying "Stock Chance Ended" is displayed. Then, when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed during the end suggestion performance, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at a loss ("142") as shown in FIG. 75(q).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol passes and the small hit special symbol stops displaying, the second special symbol TZ2 stops displaying at the small winning number ("3V3") as shown in FIG. 75(r). Then, a stock release effect suggesting that a stocked advantageous condition for the player (in this case, a small winning game) will be released is executed, and a character image "BONUS release" is displayed.

Then, when the opening of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 75(s), the opening effect is started and a second right-hitting notification is sent to urge the game ball to be fired to the right side of the game area 5a. (Display of second right-handed hitting image MG2, output of “right-handed hitting” sound) is executed. Then, when the round game of the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. The display is updated.

In this way, at least one of the execution period of the variable display of the second special symbol (first variable display) and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbol (second variable display) during the time saving gaming state (second gaming state). If the parts overlap, the game performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (stock chance performance) and the game performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (variable performance of performance symbols) can be executed (in parallel) possible). Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time saving game state, during the game performance (stock chance performance) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the game performance (acquisition failure performance, acquisition success performance) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is performed multiple times. It is executable. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are multiple chances for an advantageous result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if any of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), the time-saving gaming state can be ended, and the first ending condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is satisfied (the remaining number of time-saving games). = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, the variable performance (game performance) in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the normal symbol is not ended midway. , When the second ending condition for ending the time-saving game state is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ are displayed in response to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol. It is possible to end the variable performance (game performance) in which the variable display is performed (the performance pattern 70a becomes hidden) midway. Therefore, when the second termination condition is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving game state can be ended in an innovative manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after starting a variable performance (game performance) in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), the time-saving gaming state is ended. When the first ending condition is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving normal symbols = 0), a variable effect (game effect) in which the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner is executed for the first period (the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed). On the other hand, after starting a variable performance (game performance) in which the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game When the second ending condition for terminating the state is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), a variable effect (game effect) in which the effect pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner is executed for a second period (changes in special symbols). It is possible to end the process after a certain amount of time has passed. Therefore, the performance at the end of the time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether the first end condition is satisfied or the second end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance is executed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3, which are displayed in a variable manner in response to the winning variation display of the normal symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol, suggest an advantageous result to the player. By being visible, it is possible to notify the player that the result is advantageous. Therefore, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display of the normal symbol is an advantageous result for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance is executed, the performance symbol 70a is hidden after the result indicating an advantageous result to the player (during BONUS display), but the third special symbol TZ3 is a result indicating an advantageous result to the player. It is designed to continue displaying results that suggest the following. Therefore, since the performance symbol 70a is hidden, a wide display area for performance can be secured, and the third special symbol TZ3 allows the player to confirm that the result is advantageous, and the game It becomes possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol. When a performance is executed, it is possible to execute a special performance (stock chance performance) that suggests that an advantageous state is waiting for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the stock chance performance is configured with two types of performance modes (first stock mode, second stock mode), and in the first stock mode, a specific performance (stock increase performance) is performed while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the second stock mode, a specific performance (a performance that notifies the stock number such as a stock increase performance) is executed while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. It's okay.

In addition, before the start of the stock chance production, a winning variation display of the normal symbol (a variation display in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern) is started, and this winning variation display is When ending during the stock chance performance, a specific performance (performance that notifies the stock number, such as a stock increase performance) corresponding to this win fluctuation display may be executed during the stock chance performance.

In addition, if the normal symbol winning variation display (variation display in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a long opening pattern) is started during the execution of the stock chance performance, this A specific performance corresponding to the winning fluctuation display (a performance that notifies the stock number such as a stock increase performance) is not executed, but the normal symbol winning fluctuation display (the second starting port 47 is in a long open pattern) is not executed during the execution of the stock chance performance. When a winning fluctuation display (variable display in which an auxiliary game to be released is executed) is started and this winning fluctuation display ends after the end of the stock chance performance, a specific performance corresponding to this winning fluctuation display (such as a stock increase performance, etc.) is started. An effect that notifies the number of players) may also be performed.

Moreover, although the performance that suggests the remaining time of the stock chance performance is not performed, a countdown performance (remaining time notification performance) that suggests the remaining time of the stock chance performance may be performed.

(Example of display where the result is displayed when the time-saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 76, an example of a performance in which a result display (display showing the results of games in a series of advantageous periods) is performed when the time-saving game state ends will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the losing normal symbol with two time-saving normal symbols remaining, the production symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 stops temporarily when the result is a loss ("561"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the remaining number of times image KG indicates "2 times remaining."

Then, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol with one remaining time saving symbol remaining is started, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is started. , the number in the general figure reservation number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure reserve icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the corresponding icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "2 times remaining" to "1 time remaining".

After that, when one game ball enters the general game gate 44 and the general game ball holding memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the general game holding number display area 70G changes from "3" to "4". ", and one white icon (pending icon) is additionally displayed in the general drawing pending icon display area 70D.

Next, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 stop at the losing number (“134”), as shown in FIG. 76(c). indicate. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol whose remaining number of time-saving normal symbols becomes 0 is started, the time-saving gaming state ends, and as shown in FIG. 76(d), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol The variable display of TZ3 is started, the number in the general figure reservation number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the general figure reservation icon display area 70D are changed to the corresponding icon display. One of the icons is shifted toward the area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "0 remaining".

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The image, the production pattern 70a, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the regular pattern reservation icon HI displayed in the regular pattern reservation icon display area 70D gradually become invisible.

Further, when the shutter image is completely closed, a result display showing the results of games during a series of advantageous periods is performed, as shown in FIG. 76(f). Specifically, character images of "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "750 pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed. Further, when the variable time period has elapsed, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at a loss ("537") while the performance symbol 70a is not displayed.

Next, when the loss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, as shown in FIG. The number in the number display area 70G decreases from "3" to "2". However, at this time, the first pending memory (U1) does not exist and the customer is in a waiting state, so the result display continues. Then, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at the losing number ("748") as shown in FIG. 76(h).

Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. A white pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, and a normal (mode A) background image is displayed. Then, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 76(j), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started, and the first pending number display The number in the area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed.

In this way, the time-saving gaming state can be ended when any one of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), and the first ending condition among the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied (the time-saving gaming state). When the time-saving gaming state ends with the remaining number of drawings = 0), it is possible to execute a specific display (result display) showing the results of the games in a series of advantageous periods. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state ends, it is possible to check the results of the games during the series of advantageous periods, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the games.

In addition, during a specific display (result display) that is executed when the time-saving gaming state ends, a fluctuating display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol holding memory (F) stored during the time-saving gaming state (the performance symbol 70a) It is possible to perform a variable performance in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without any variable display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the fluctuating display of normal symbols that is more disadvantageous than in the time-saving gaming state is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after a specific display (result display) showing the results of games in a series of advantageous periods has been executed, even if a new variable display of normal symbols is executed, the specific display (result display) does not end, and a new first When the variable display of special symbols is executed, the specific display (result display) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the specific display (result display) ends too soon and the player cannot check it, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the hit determination based on the normal pattern holding memory (F) stored during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) is executed during the time-saving gaming state, the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are While it is possible to execute a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display, the hit determination based on the normal pattern holding memory (F) stored during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) is performed after the time-saving gaming state ends. When executed during the normal gaming state (first gaming state), execution of a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 is restricted (the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is A variable effect is executed in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without accompanying. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the variable display of normal symbols will be executed in the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the first end condition among the plurality of end conditions is met (remaining number of time-saving regular games = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state does not go through the jackpot game. If it is in the third time-saving game state to be transferred, which of the multiple ending conditions (remaining number of time-saving general drawings = 0, remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0, remaining number of time-saving small winnings = 0) is satisfied to save time. Even if the gaming state ends, a specific display (result display) showing the results of the games in a series of advantageous periods may not be executed.

(Example of performance where result display is not displayed when time-saving gaming state ends)
With reference to FIG. 77, an example of a performance in which a result display (a display showing the results of games in a series of advantageous periods) is not performed when the time-saving game state ends will be described.

When the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(a), 50 times is set as the remaining number of time saving games (G), the first pending memory (U1) is "1", and the second The first time-saving game state is started when the pending memory (U2) is "0", and the time-saving (mode A) background image and the first right-handed hitting image MG1 prompting to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. , and the remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving general map (G) is displayed as "50 remaining".

At this time, the first holding memory (U1) is "1", the second holding memory (U2) and the normal symbol holding memory (F) are "0", and the normal symbol loss fluctuation display is executed. However, since it was started during the jackpot game, the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a.

Then, when the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 77(b), a fluctuation performance in which the first special symbol TZ1 is fluctuated and displayed without the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a is started. The number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", but since the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the remaining number image KG corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G) is Not updated. In addition, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the loss normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the production pattern 70a maintains the stop number after the previous fluctuation display, and the third special symbol TZ3 shows the loss number ("225") ) to stop and display.

Further, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the first special symbol TZ1 is stopped and displayed at the losing number ("156"). Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first reservation memory (U1) increases from "0" to "1", and the first reservation number display area 70E increases from "0" to "1". do.

Thereafter, the player continues to hit the ball to the left aiming at the left side of the game area 5a, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol are repeated. Then, when the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol with which the remaining number of time-saving special symbols becomes “0” is started, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the first special symbol is A variable effect in which the symbol TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner is executed, and the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1". The remaining number of times image KG corresponding to (G) is not updated.

Next, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state returns, but at this point, the performance display corresponding to the normal gaming state (display of performance symbols in the display mode corresponding to the normal gaming state, background image corresponding to the normal gaming state) display etc.) are not executed.

After that, at the timing of receiving the first command of the production control board 130 after transitioning to the normal gaming state, here, when the first variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 77(f), A mode transition image MI that shields the production pattern 70a is displayed, and the first special pattern TZ1 starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the number in the first pending number display area 70E is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0".

Then, when the display time of the mode transition image MI has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the mode transition image MI is erased and the effect display corresponding to the normal game state is started. Specifically, it corresponds to the normal (mode A) background image corresponding to the normal gaming state, the effect pattern 70a that is variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the first special symbol. The icon display area 70C in which the icon TI is displayed is displayed.

In addition, if a customer waiting state designation command is received at the timing of the first command reception of the production control board 130 after transitioning to the normal gaming state, this command will be used as a trigger to start displaying the production corresponding to the normal gaming state. However, in this case, the effect display corresponding to the normal gaming state may be started after displaying the mode transition image MI, or the effect display corresponding to the normal gaming state may be started without displaying the mode transition image MI. Display may also be started.

In this way, it is possible to end the time-saving gaming state when any one of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), and the first ending condition among the plurality of ending conditions (the remaining time-saving game state) When the time-saving gaming state ends with the number of times = 0), it is possible to execute a specific display (result display) that suggests the results of games in a series of advantageous periods, and the second ending condition among the plurality of ending conditions. When the time-saving game state is completed by establishing (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), execution of a specific display (result display) showing the results of games in a series of advantageous periods is restricted. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state ends, it is possible to check the results of the games during the series of advantageous periods, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the games.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the first reservation memory (U1) increases, the main control board 110 sends a winning command (first reservation number designation command) to the performance control board 130. , 1st special figure pre-reading designation command) is transmitted, but if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the time-saving gaming state and the first reservation memory (U1) increases, the first reservation number Although the number in the display area 70E is updated to increase, the first pending icon is not additionally displayed, so the first pending icon change effect is not executed. Therefore, in a time-saving gaming state in which it is important to execute a variable display of normal symbols, the player is informed that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting hole 45 and that a variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed. It is possible to make the game less noticeable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) (the first acquisition condition is met), the first effect display ( For example, pre-reading effects such as icon change effects) are limited, but the second effect display (displaying the number of pending items in the pending icon display area or the pending number display area) in response to the second command (pending number designation command) is limited. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the general game gate 44 during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state) (the second acquisition condition is met), the first performance according to the first command (pre-reading designation command) is executed. display (for example, a look-ahead effect such as an icon change effect), and a second effect display (display of the number of pending items in the pending icon display area or the pending number display area) in response to the second command (command for specifying the number of pending items). It looks like this. Therefore, the performance can be made different between when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in the second embodiment, on the condition that the first reservation memory (U1) exists at the start of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game remaining is set to 4 times while storing the game-saving game reservation memory (F). The auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens in a long opening pattern is executed over a plurality of fluctuating displays of normal symbols until the number of times (G) reaches "0", resulting in almost a small hit or a jackpot. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a battle mode effect is executed to encourage whether or not to stock (increase) 2 reserved memories (U2), so only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving in the second embodiment)
FIG. 78(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table in the second embodiment.

As the production contents shown in the time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78(a), "battle mode variation" means that the above-mentioned battle mode production is performed.
"Stock release fluctuation" refers to a jackpot game via a small winning game or a jackpot game not via a small winning game while releasing (decreasing) the second holding memory (U2) that was stocked (increased) during the battle mode performance. This means that a stock release fluctuation effect is performed to notify that the stock release will be executed.

Regarding the stock release fluctuation, if the battle mode performance is in progress, the stock release fluctuation performance will be executed, but if the battle mode performance is not in progress, the reach will be executed after the fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 starts. An immediate win variation performance is executed in which the performance symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 that become a winning result are stopped and displayed without going through the process.

(Game state setting table in second embodiment)
FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing an example of the first gaming state setting table in the second embodiment, and FIG. 78(c) is a diagram showing an example of the second gaming state setting table in the modified example.

In the game state setting table shown in FIGS. 78(b) and 78(c), the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) is "5" in all cases (the first normal symbol executed during the time-saving gaming state). The number corresponds to the total of 1 fluctuating display + 4 times that is stored as a normal pattern holding memory (F) during the fluctuating display of this normal symbol), and the normal symbol is executed in these "5 times". The total time of the variable display of is shorter than the time of the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the time saving game state. In other words, before the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the time saving game state ends, the variable display of the normal symbols executed five times in the time saving gaming state is completed.

In addition, by setting the upper limit number of Fuzuzu reservation memory (F) to "3" which is smaller than the upper limit number of the first retention memory (U1) and the upper limit number of the second retention memory (U2), the remaining number of time saving Fuzuzu (G) "4 times" (1 time of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol executed first during the time-saving gaming state + 3 times of fluctuating display of the normal symbol that is stored as the regular symbol holding memory (F) during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol It may be a number corresponding to the total).

(Hit determination table for normal symbols in the second embodiment)
FIG. 78(d) is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the second embodiment.

In the hit determination table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 78(d), since the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) set in the first embodiment is small, the normal symbol in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 35(a) is The probability of a hit is higher than the symbol hit determination table.

(General pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving in the second embodiment)
FIG. 78(e) is a diagram illustrating an example of a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving in the second embodiment.

In the time-saving regular pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78(e), the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols (G ) is set to "0", that is, the normal symbol variation time is set so that the normal symbol variation display is executed five times.

As for the production content shown in the time-saving common figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78(e), "battle defeat variation" is a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and the ally character is defeated in the end. An effect that suggests that the result is disadvantageous to the player, that is, the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens in a long opening pattern is not executed, and the second pending memory (U2) is not stocked (increased). means that it will be executed.
"Battle victory variation" means that an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, and the ally character ultimately wins, resulting in an advantageous result for the player. In other words, the second starting port 47 is in a long open pattern. This means that an opening auxiliary game is executed and a performance that suggests that the second reserved memory (U2) becomes a chance to be stocked (increased) is executed.

(Example of a battle mode performance)
An example of a battle mode effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), during the ending of the jackpot game, a time-saving rush effect is executed, and an addictive caution image NG is displayed to alert the user against excessively absorbing the game. At this time, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is being executed, and the fluctuating performance in which the third special symbol TZ3 is fluctuatingly displayed without the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is being performed.

After that, when the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the remaining number of time saving games (G) is set to 5, and the first reservation memory (U1) is "1". The time-saving game state is started with the second pending memory (U2) in a state of "0". Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (battle mode variable production) is started, the variable display of the first special symbol TZ1 is started without the variable display of the production symbol 70a, and the first reserved number display area 70E is The number decreases from "1" to "0".

In addition, the battle mode performance is started, and the normal pattern icon display areas FT1 to FT5 for displaying icons corresponding to the five normal pattern fluctuation displays (normal pattern determination information) in the time-saving gaming state are displayed in gray. . In addition, a second right-hitting notification (a second right-hitting image MG2 is displayed) that prompts the game ball to be fired to the right side of the gaming area 5a.Furthermore, a decision indicating the result of the first normal symbol fluctuation display is performed. The remaining time until the performance starts is displayed as "7 seconds".

After that, when the game ball passes through the game ball gate 44 and the game ball holds memory (F) increases from "0" to "1", the game ball icon display section FT1 changes as shown in FIG. 79(c). A colored display effect is performed and the icon is displayed as a white icon, which is a normal icon. Furthermore, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, a variable performance in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and a countdown of the remaining time is started.

Then, when the two game balls pass through the general game gate 44 and the standard game holding memory (F) increases from "0" to "2", the standard game icon display area is displayed as shown in FIG. 79(d). The FT2 and the standard icon display section FT3 are each displayed in color, and are displayed as a white icon which is a normal icon.

Furthermore, when two game balls pass through the general game ball gate 44 and the standard game holding memory (F) increases from "2" to "4", the standard game icon display area as shown in FIG. 79(e) The FT4 and the standard icon display section FT5 are each displayed in color, and are displayed as white icons, which are normal icons. In addition, after the number of games held in the game ball (F) reaches the upper limit of "4", the icon changes as a look-ahead effect every time a game ball passes through the game ball gate 44 (overflow of the game ball's hold memory). A lottery is held, and if you win, an icon change effect is executed in which the color of one of the normal symbols changes, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol pending memory (F) results in an advantageous result for the player. This suggests the possibility that

After that, when the remaining time until the final performance suggesting the result of the general pattern fluctuation display corresponding to the general pattern icon displayed in the general pattern icon display section FT1 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 79(f), When the remaining time reaches "0 seconds" and the final performance begins, the character image "Let's go!" is displayed as shown in Figure 79 (g), and then as shown in Figure 79 (h). At the same time as the validity period occurs, the regular map icon in the regular map icon display section FT1 changes to a button image and a gauge image, thereby starting a promotion performance that prompts the user to operate the performance button 17. At this time, the ordinary figure icon display section FT1 is displayed in gray, and the ordinary figure icon is displayed as disappearing.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(i), an effect is performed in which the effect button image is erased, and a decision failure effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 79(j), a character image of "Unfortunate" is displayed. Then, when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at the losing number ("417").

Furthermore, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 80(k), a battle variable effect is started in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner without the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(l), a character image "1ST Battle" is displayed, and a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle is started.

After that, when the final phase of the battle performance arrives, the final stage performance is started, and as shown in FIG. 80(m), the validity period occurs and the common picture icon in the common picture icon display area FT2 changes to a button image and a gauge image. As a result, a promotion performance that prompts the user to operate the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the ordinary figure icon display section FT1 is displayed in gray, and the ordinary figure icon is displayed as disappearing.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(n), an effect is performed in which the effect button image is erased, and a decision failure effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(o), the character image "Unfortunate" is displayed, and when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed as a losing symbol. It is stopped and displayed at the ``562'' mark. Thereafter, the variable display (battle variation effect) of the normal symbols corresponding to the normal pattern icon display section FT3, the normal pattern icon display section FT4, and the general pattern icon display section FT5 is executed in order.

After that, when the variable display (battle variable effect) of the normal symbol corresponding to the ordinary figure icon display section FT5 is started, the time-saving game state ends, and the effect button 17 is operated in the deciding effect of the final phase in the battle effect. If the validity period has passed, as shown in FIG. 80(p), a performance is performed in which the performance button image is deleted, and a decision failure performance is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(q), the character image "Unfortunate" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 80(r), results for a series of advantageous periods are displayed.

In addition, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(s), the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed at the losing number ("537"), The result display continues. After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the timing of reception of the first command of the production control board 130 after transitioning to the normal gaming state, here, the first variable display of the first special symbol starts. When this happens, the mode transition image MI that covers the production symbol 70a is displayed, and the first special symbol TZ1 starts variable display, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". Display decrease.

On the other hand, when the successful decision performance is performed, when the performance button 17 is operated or the effective period has elapsed, a performance is performed in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" (here, it is a jackpot). (This will be announced). After that, the effects change as shown in FIGS. 73(a) to 73(g).

In this way, on the condition that the first hold memory (U1) exists at the start of the time-saving gaming state, the display of multiple normal symbols is displayed until the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0". It is possible to execute battle mode effects that are executed by Therefore, the time-saving game state can be shown as a series of effects, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the time-saving gaming state (second gaming state), at least part of the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbol (second variable display) If they overlap, the game effect (battle mode effect) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the game effect (battle mode effect) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed separately (can be executed in parallel). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the performance effect during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, during the game performance (battle mode performance) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the game performance (battle mode performance) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed multiple times. There is. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are multiple chances for an advantageous result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the Gaming machines that execute game effects are common. Some of these gaming machines control the game to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special game ends (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-057968). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting slot) in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. a first determination means that determines the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the first acquisition condition; and a first holding storage (first A first storage means for storing the information as (holding memory) and determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the regular map gate, second starting gate). a second determination means for determining the second acquisition condition; a second storage means for storing the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reservation memory (common diagram reservation memory, second reservation memory); a state control means capable of controlling a gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming according to the determination result of the first determining means. and a performance control means capable of executing a performance (a first variable performance) and a second game performance (a regular figure fluctuation performance, a second variable performance) according to the determination result of the second determination means, The control means is capable of displaying a first icon (a first hold icon) corresponding to the first hold memory and a second icon (a general hold icon, a second hold icon) corresponding to the second hold memory. The display of the second icon is restricted during the first gaming state, but the first icon can be displayed, and the display of the first icon is restricted during the second gaming state. However, the second icon can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The second configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting slot) in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. a first determination means for determining determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the regular figure gate, second starting gate); a second determining means for determining normal figure determination information, special figure determination information), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; possible state control means, a first game performance (first fluctuation performance) according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance) according to the determination result of the second determination means. , a second variable performance), and the performance control means is capable of executing a first determination result (a second variable performance) that is different from a losing result when the second determination means determines that the second determination result is different from the losing result during the second gaming state. If it is determined that the opening in the long opening pattern of the starting opening, a jackpot, a small win), a first result suggesting performance is executed in the second game performance, while the second determining means executes the first result suggesting performance in the second game performance. If it is determined that the result is a second determination result different from the first determination result (e.g. opening with a short opening pattern of the second starting opening), a second determination result different from the first result suggestion performance in the second game performance is determined. 2 Execute the result suggestion performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The third configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting slot) in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. a first determination means for determining determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the regular figure gate, second starting gate); a second determining means for determining normal figure determination information, special figure determination information), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; possible state control means, and a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means or the second judgment means (a first variable effect, a normal figure variable effect, a second variable effect) ), and the judgment result of the second judgment means includes a first judgment result different from the loss result (opening in the long opening pattern of the second starting opening, jackpot, small win). and a second determination result different from the first determination result (opening in a short opening pattern of the second starting opening, a special loss resulting in c time reduction), and the performance control means is configured to perform a second determination result during the second gaming state. When the second determination means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result, the plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode in the variable performance (winning number, odd numbered symbols aligned), and the During the second game state, when the second determination means determines the second determination result (opening in the short opening pattern of the second starting opening, a special loss resulting in c time reduction), in the variable performance, the plurality of The performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (loss outcome, even numbered symbols). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The fourth configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special symbol determination information) based on the first determining means; and a first determining means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determining means. A second determination that determines the acquired determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) based on the variable display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entry into the regular map gate, second starting gate) means, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal game state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming performance (first variable performance) corresponding to the first variable display. , performance control means capable of executing a second game performance (normal figure fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second fluctuation display, and the performance control means is configured to perform a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second fluctuation display, and the performance control means is configured to In this case, the execution of the second game performance is restricted, and the second game performance can be executed during the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole). a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special symbol determination information) based on the first determining means; and a first determining means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determining means. A second determination that determines the acquired determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) based on the variable display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entry into the regular map gate, second starting gate) means, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal game state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming performance (first variable performance) corresponding to the first variable display. , performance control means capable of executing a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second variable display, and the performance control means is configured to perform a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second fluctuation display, and the performance control means is configured to When at least a portion of the execution period of the first variable display and the execution period of the second variable display overlap, the first game performance and the second game performance can be executed, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the first starting hole). a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special symbol determination information) based on the first determining means; and a first determining means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determining means. A second determination that determines the acquired determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) based on the variable display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entry into the regular map gate, second starting gate) means, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal game state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming performance (first variable performance) corresponding to the first variable display. , performance control means capable of executing a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second fluctuation display, and the state control means, in the second game state, Either the number of occurrences of the first game event (the total number of changes in special symbols, the number of changes in the first special symbol, etc.) becomes the first number of times, or the number of occurrences of a second game event different from the first game event (normal symbols When the number of variations of the second special symbol, the number of variations of the second special symbol, and the number of small wins) reach the second number, it is possible to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the first starting hole). a first determination means that determines the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the first acquisition condition; and a first holding storage (first A first storage means for storing the information as (holding memory) and determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the regular map gate, second starting gate). a second determination means for determining the second acquisition condition; a second storage means for storing the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reservation memory (common diagram reservation memory, second reservation memory); a state control means capable of controlling a gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming according to the determination result of the first determining means. a performance control means capable of executing a performance (a first variable performance) and a second game performance (a regular pattern fluctuation performance, a second variation performance) according to the determination result of the second determination means, The control means terminates the second gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (the remaining number of time-saving special symbols has been exhausted, the remaining number of time-saving regular symbols has been exhausted, the remaining number of time-saving small wins has been exhausted). and the performance control means is configured such that the second determination means determines that the second determination means is in the second gaming state based on the second pending memory stored during the second gaming state. When executed, the second game performance can be executed, and the second determination means makes a determination based on the second pending memory stored during the second game state after the second game state ends. When executed during the first game state, execution of the second game performance is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special symbol determination information) based on the first determining means; and a first determining means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determining means. A second determination that determines the acquired determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) based on the variable display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entry into the regular map gate, second starting gate) means, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal game state), a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance related to the game, the performance control The means performs a predetermined preview performance (jackpot preview performance: pre-reach preview performance, post-reach preview performance) that suggests the determination result of the second determination means corresponding to the second fluctuation display during the second fluctuation display. If it is possible to execute and the second variable display is executed during the first gaming state, the execution of the preview performance is restricted and the second variable display is executed during the second gaming state, The aforementioned preview performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, operable movable presentation means (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port), and a determination by the first determining means. A first variable display execution means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result, and acquisition based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal pattern gate, second starting port) a second determination means for determining the determined determination information (normal symbol determination information, special symbol determination information); and a second variable display (variable display for the normal symbol, variable display for the second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination means. a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display); and a state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state. and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to a game, and the performance control means is configured to perform an action performance (notice action, predetermined action, etc.) for operating the movable performance means in a predetermined manner during the second variable display. success motion, etc.), and if the second variable display is executed during the first gaming state, the execution of the motion effect is restricted, and the second variable display is executed during the second gaming state. When executed, the motion effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (effect buttons, effect levers, etc.) that can be operated by the player. and a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port), and based on the determination result of the first determining means. A first variable display execution means that executes the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) and a determination obtained based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal pattern gate, second starting port) a second determination means for determining information (regular symbol determination information, special symbol determination information), and a second variable display (variable display of the ordinary symbol, variable display of the second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination means. a second variable display execution means for executing; a state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance related to the above, wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a predetermined operation performance (a preview performance, a final performance, etc.) that causes the operation means to be operated during the second variable display. When the second variable display is executed during the first gaming state, execution of the operation performance is restricted, and when the second variable display is executed during the second gaming state, the operation It is possible to perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a first determination means for determining determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the regular figure gate, second starting gate); a second determining means for determining normal figure determination information, special figure determination information), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; a possible state control means, and a performance control means for executing a fluctuating performance (a first fluctuating performance, a regular pattern fluctuating performance, a second fluctuating performance) according to the determination result of the first determining means or the second determining means; The performance control means is configured to control a specific performance that indicates which of a first advantageous result and a second advantageous result, which have different degrees of advantage to the player, during the variable performance that has an advantageous result to the player. (re-lottery performance), and the first determining means determines that the result is an advantageous result (jackpot) during the first gaming state, and the second determining means during the second gaming state. The execution rate of the specific performance differs depending on whether it is determined to be an advantageous result (win, jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the first starting hole). a first determination means that determines the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired based on the first acquisition condition; and a first holding storage (first A first storage means for storing the information as (holding memory) and determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the regular map gate, second starting gate). a second determination means for determining the second acquisition condition; a second storage means for storing the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reservation memory (common diagram reservation memory, second reservation memory); a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (variable display of the normal symbol, variable display of the second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination means; a first gaming state (normal gaming state); and the first gaming state. A state control means capable of controlling a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the above, and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to the game, and the performance control means stores a state in the second reservation memory. It is possible to execute a look-ahead performance (such as an icon change performance, a look-ahead continuous notice performance, etc.) that foretells the result of the corresponding fluctuating display in advance, and when the fluctuating display is executed during the first gaming state, the look-ahead performance When execution of is restricted and the fluctuating display is executed during the second gaming state, the pre-read effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the first starting hole). a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special figure determination information) based on the above, and a first variable display execution that executes a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determining means. means, a second determining means that determines the acquired determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the general gate, second starting gate), a second variable display execution means for executing two variable displays (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state; The first variable display execution means is equipped with a state control means capable of controlling a gaming state (time-saving gaming state) and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to the game, and the first variable display execution means is configured to control when a predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear, When the number of times the first variable display has been executed since the end of the jackpot game, the end of the small win game, a change in the game state, etc. reaches a predetermined number of times, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation display. The second variable display execution means is restricted from switching the variable pattern table for determining the variable pattern of the second variable display during the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, winning of game media to the first starting area (to the special second starting slot) is possible. a first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (the arrival of the game medium into the second starting area (the special figure determination information); a second determining means for determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) for controlling the first starting area to an open state based on determination information acquired by the ball entering the ball; and a normal game state; A state control means capable of controlling a specific game state different from the normal game state (regular figure time shortening, normal train time shortening, special figure time shortening), and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to the game, The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) and a second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state, a third time-saving gaming state). ), and the probability that the second starting area is controlled to be open in a specific opening pattern (long opening pattern) is different between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, winning of game media to the first starting area (to the special second starting opening) is possible. a first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (the arrival of the game medium into the second starting area (the special figure determination information); a second determining means for determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) for controlling the first starting area to an open state based on determination information acquired by the ball entering the ball; and a normal game state; A state control means capable of controlling a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to the game, and the special gaming state is A first specific game state (for example, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state) that goes through the game, and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) that does not go through the special game, and The probability that the second starting area is controlled to be open in a specific opening pattern (long opening pattern) is different between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means, In a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game (jackpot game), the main control means controls the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole). ); a first variable display execution means that executes a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determining means; a second determining means for determining the acquired determination information (ball entering the gate, second starting port), and a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, second a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of special symbols), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; a state control means, and the performance control means controls a first game performance (first variable performance) according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the second determination means. If the second variable display is executed during the first game state, the main control means causes the effect control means to control the second variable display. Commands related to the 2-variation display (normal symbol designation command, regular symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, special symbol designation command for the second special symbol, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command for the second special symbol) are transmitted, but the second When the execution of the fluctuating performance is restricted and the second fluctuating display is executed during the second gaming state, the main control means sends a command related to the second fluctuating display to the performance control means (normal symbol designation command, A common symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, a special symbol designation command for the second special symbol, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command for the second special symbol) are transmitted, and the second fluctuation performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means, In a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game (jackpot game), the main control means controls the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole). ); a first variable display execution means that executes a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determining means; a second determining means for determining the acquired determination information (ball entering the gate, second starting port), and a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, second a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of special symbols), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; a state control means, and when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, a first command (prefetch designation command) and a second command (pending number designation command) are executed. and the effect control means is capable of executing a first effect display (pre-read effect) in response to the first command and a second effect display (suspension display) in response to the second command. , when the first acquisition condition is satisfied during the first gaming state, the first effect display according to the first command and the second effect display according to the second command are executed, and the second effect display according to the second command is executed. If the second acquisition condition is satisfied during one gaming state, execution of the first effect display according to the first command is restricted, but the second effect display according to the second command is not executed. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means, In a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game (jackpot game), the main control means controls the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole). ); a first variable display execution means that executes a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determining means; a second determining means for determining the acquired determination information (ball entering the gate, second starting port), and a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, second a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of special symbols), a first gaming state (normal gaming state), and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; a state control means, and when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, a first command (prefetch designation command) and a second command (pending number designation command) are executed. and the effect control means is capable of executing a first effect display (pre-read effect) in response to the first command and a second effect display (suspension display) in response to the second command. , if the first acquisition condition is satisfied during the second gaming state, execution of the first effect display in response to the first command is restricted, but the second effect display in response to the second command is restricted. is executed and the second acquisition condition is satisfied during the second gaming state, the first effect display according to the first command and the second effect display according to the second command are executed. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the first starting hole). a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special symbol determination information) based on the first determining means; and a first determining means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determining means. A second determination that determines the acquired determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) based on the variable display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entry into the regular map gate, second starting gate) means, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal game state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming performance (first variable performance) corresponding to the first variable display. , performance control means capable of executing a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second fluctuation display, and the state control means, in the second game state, Either the first ending condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0, etc.), or the second ending condition is different from the first ending condition (for example, the remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0, the remaining number of time-saving small winnings = 0, etc.) is established, it is possible to end the second gaming state, and the performance control means determines that the first ending condition is satisfied after starting the second gaming performance in the second gaming state. In this case, if the second game performance is ended in the first period and the second end condition is satisfied after the second game performance is started in the second game state, the second game performance is ended in the first period. It is possible to end with a second period different from the second period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is to satisfy the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a first determining means that determines the acquired determination information (special symbol determination information) based on the first determining means; and a first determining means that executes a first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determining means. A second determination that determines the acquired determination information (regular map determination information, special map determination information) based on the variable display execution means and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entry into the regular map gate, second starting gate) means, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal game state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; and a first gaming performance (first variable performance) corresponding to the first variable display. , performance control means capable of executing a second game performance (normal pattern fluctuation performance, second fluctuation performance) corresponding to the second fluctuation display, and the state control means, in the second game state, Either the first ending condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0, etc.), or the second ending condition is different from the first ending condition (for example, the remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0, the remaining number of time-saving small winnings = 0, etc.) is established, it is possible to end the second gaming state, and when the second gaming state is ended due to the establishment of the first ending condition, the performance control means displays a specific display ( If the second gaming state ends when the second ending condition is satisfied, execution of the specific display (result display) is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the regular gate, the second starting gate). a determination means for determining determination information (normal symbol determination information, special symbol determination information) acquired based on the ball); and a variable display (variable display of the normal symbol, variable display of the second special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means. a variable display execution means for executing a display); a state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state; performance control means capable of controlling the performance related to the above, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance while waiting for a customer to appeal to players (such as a customer waiting demonstration performance, display of a guide image for adjusting volume and light intensity, etc.). is executable, and in the first gaming state, the customer waiting performance is executable when the variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbol) is being executed, and the In the second gaming state, when the variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of the second special symbol) is being executed, execution of the customer waiting performance is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in the order in which the game balls enter the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47, good.

Further, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, the control related to the normal symbol of the present invention and the control related to the second special symbol may be replaced. Specifically, in the normal game state, a variable performance (game performance) is executed in which a variable display of the second special symbol TZ2 is performed without a variable display of the performance symbol 70a during a variable display of the second special symbol. , the holding icon corresponding to the second holding memory and the corresponding icon are not displayed, and in the time-saving gaming state, a variable performance (in which the effect pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 are displayed in a variable manner while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner) At the same time as executing the game performance), a pending icon corresponding to the second pending memory and the icon may be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a variable probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of special jackpot symbol, the variable probability gaming state may be generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first jackpot opening 50 is A process may be performed to generate a variable probability gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or a variable display that produces a variable probability gaming state may be performed based on the gaming state when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 53. A process for determining the number of times may be performed.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line (the awarding condition is met) by a game using medals (gaming media), a predetermined amount of The present invention can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine) that can award prize medals (prize medal data) to players. Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 First big winning slot 56 Second big winning slot 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a command from the main control means,
The main control means includes:
a first determining means that executes a determination regarding execution of the special game based on determination information acquired based on winning of the game medium in the special starting area ;
a first storage means for storing determination information that has been acquired based on winning of the game medium in the special start area but has not yet been determined by the first determination means as a first reserved memory;
first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display based on the determination result of the first determination means;
a first look-ahead means that makes a determination regarding execution of the special game before the first determination means;
a second determining means for executing a determination related to execution of an auxiliary game that controls the special starting area to be open based on determination information acquired based on winning of game media in the normal starting area ;
a second storage means for storing determination information that has been acquired based on winning of the game medium in the normal start area but has not yet been determined by the second determination means as a second pending storage;
a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display based on the determination result of the second determination means;
a second look-ahead means that makes a determination regarding execution of the auxiliary game before the second determination means;
a state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
When a game medium wins in the special starting area , it is possible to transmit a prefetch command according to the determination result of the first prefetching means and a suspension command according to the number of the first suspension memories,
When a game medium is won in the normal start area , it is possible to transmit a prefetch command according to the determination result of the second prefetching means and a suspension command according to the number of the second suspension memories ,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a prefetch effect display according to the prefetch command and a pending number display according to the pending command,
During execution of the first variable display and/or the second variable display, it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player is vibrated in a predetermined manner;
If a game medium is won in the special start area during the first gaming state, the prefetch effect display according to the prefetch command and the pending number display according to the pending command are executed,
If a game medium is won in the normal start area during the first gaming state, execution of the prefetch effect display in response to the prefetch command is restricted, but the pending number display in response to the pending command is not executed. A gaming machine characterized by: